Sysmex KX21N Manual Servicio PDF

SERVICE MANUAL
Automated Hematology Analyzer
KX-21 SERIES
Section 1 Specifications
Section 2 Hydraulics and Mechanical System
Section 3 Electronics
Section 4 Adjustment
Section 5 Maintenance Programs
Section 6 Error Message and Troubleshooting
Section 7 Schematics
Appendix A Parts List
Appendix B Installation Procedures
SYSMEX CORPORATION
KOBE, JAPAN
SYSMEX CORPORATION, TECHNO CENTER
4-4-4 Takatsukadai, Nishi-ku, Kobe 651-2271, Japan
TELEPHONE: 81-78-991-1911
FAX: 81-78-992-3274
URL=http://www.sysmex.co.jp
SYSMEX CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Gilmer Road, 6699 RFD, Long Grove, IL 60047-9596, U.S.A.
TELEPHONE: 1-847-726-3500
FAX: 1-847-726-3505
URL=http://www.sysmex.com/
SYSMEX UK LIMITED
Sunrise Parkway, Linford Wood (East), Milton Keynes, Buckinghamshire, MK14 6QF, U.K.
TELEPHONE: 44-1908-669555
FAX: 44-1908-669409
SYSMEX EUROPE GmbH

Bornbarch 1 22848, Norderstedt, Germany
TELEPHONE: 49-40-527260
FAX: 49-40-52726100
SYSMEX SINGAPORE PTE LTD.

2 Woodlands Sector 1, #01-06, Woodlands Spectrum Singapore 738068
TELEPHONE: 65-221-3629
FAX: 65-221-3687
Copyright © 1998 through 2000 by SYSMEX CORPORATION
First Edition April 1998

Second Edition June 2000
All right reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced in any form or by
any electronic or mechanical means, including information storage and
retrieval systems, without written permission from the publisher.
Printed in Japan
Part Code Number

Printed Manual: 601-8245-7
CD-ROM Manual: 601-8272-8
SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE RECORD
MODEL: KX-21 SERIES
Rev. Ref. ECR/ Applicable Date Update Info. Summary Revised Pages
No. TB No. Serial No. Released
- 398E029 98/07/14 Modifying KX-21 for Chinese market. 4-9
- 398E030 98/07/14 Replacing Relief Valve used in KX-21 A-1-10
Regulator Unit
- TB98034 98/08/05 A description in Error Message 6-36
“Analysis Error [Detect Sensitivity
Error (Electrical Conductivity)] was
incorrect.
- 398C005 98/08/17 Changing the model name of Printer A-1-12
on KX-21 and K-4500.
- 398G045 98/09/14 Modifying Pneumatic Unit KX-21 for A-1-13
noise reduction
- 398G031 98/09/16 Countermeasure for the KX-21 CPU A-1-4, A-1-5
Board not to start up when Power-ON.
- 398G038 98/09/22 Countermeasure for reagent 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 7-9
consumption and pressure error on
KX-21. (Version up to 00-09)
- 398J015 99/01/25 Changing Diaphragm Pump (1 mL, 2 A-1-9
(398J028) mL) of KX-21
- 398G072 99/02/24 Changing the KX-21 Detector Block 7-2
tubing
- TB 99003 99/03/02 KX-21 Service Manual correction General TOC (ii), Sec. 2
TOC, 2-6 thru 2-64, 5-11
thru 5-13, 6-7, 7-3, A-1-2,
A-1-3, A-1-9, A-1-11
- 398J044 99/04/14 WL Flag Increase of KX-21 7-2
- 399B093 99/04/15 Updating KX-21 program ROM 1KX2F 5-12
to version 00-12.
- 399B017 99/05/18 Changing KX-21 Pneumatic Unit A-1-1, A-1-7, A-1-13,
A-1-14, A-1-15, A-3-1,
A-3-2, A-4-1, A-4-2
- 398L021 99/06/14 Changing the length of SRV rinse line 7-2
tube to prevent leakage
- 399B017R 99/12/06 Changing KX-21 Pneumatic Unit A-1-1, A-1-7, A-1-13, A-1-
(398K065) 14, A-1-15, A-3-1, A-3-2,
A-4-1, A-4-2
- TB99045 99/12/14 Updating KX-21 Parts List A-1-2, A-1-3, A-1-11
- 399K024 00/01/25 Changing tubing arrangement in A-1-11
Detector Block to prevent high WBC
background.
- 399L057 00/03/07 KX-21 Program Version Up (Ver. 00- 5-10
15).
1 300A019 A4407- 00/05/19 Addition of Printer Unit in KX-21 1-1, 1-6, 4-9, A-1-3, index
2 300C041 00/05/23 Changing tubing arrangement in A-1-11
Detector Block to prevent high WBC
background (2)
KX-21 -1/2- Revised July 2000

SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE RECORD
MODEL: KX-21_Series
Rev ECR/TB Applicable Released Summary Page
NO. NO. S/N Date
1 300A019 S/N A4407- 2000/05/29 Addition of Printer Unit 1-1, 1-6, 4-9, A-1-3,
For Parts Ordered: in KX-21 Index
Manufactured in
May 2000 and
thereafter
2 300C041 S/N A4527- 2000/07/27 Changing tubing A-1-11
arrangement in
Detector Block to
prevent high WBC
background (2)
3 200030 --- 2000/07/27 Updating KX-21 The entire manual was
Service Manual for KX- revised to add KX-21N
21N information.
4 300F002 Program version: 2000/07/27 KX-21 Program Sec.4 TOC, 4-1 thru 4-5
S/N Not fixed yet. Version Up (Ver. 00-
Printer: KX-21 S/N 16)
4147-
5 300C083 KX-21 S/N A4487 2000/09/05 Changing Diaphragm A-1-7, A-1-9, A-2-1, A-3-
and thereafter Pump (2 mL) of KX-21 1, A-3-2, A-4-4, A-4-5
KX-21N S/N A1379 Series
and thereafter
6 300H054 S/N Not fixed yet. 2000/09/13 KX-21N Program TOC ii, iv, v, Sec. 4 TOC,
Version Up (Ver. 00- 4-19, 4-20, 5-11, 5-12,
04) Sec. 6 TOC, 6-3 thru 6-9
7 300G045 KX-21 S/N A4582 2000/09/28 Registering Sample A-1-6, A-1-7, A-1-20, A-
and thereafter Rotor Fixture No. 7 3-2, A-3-4 thru A-3-6, A-
KX-21N S/N A1593 (PM) as PM Parts 4-1 thru A-4-6
and thereafter
8 300G020 KX-21 S/N A4968 2000/11/14 Changing Diaphragm A-1-7, A-1-9, A-2-1, A-3-
and thereafter Pump (2 mL) of KX-21 1, A-3-2, A-4-4, A-4-5
KX-21N S/N A1646 Series
and thereafter
9 200102R - - - 2001/02/07 Adding KX-21 WBC 4-1
and RBC sensitivity
adjustment target
values
10 200112 --- 2001/02/27 Replacing CPU board 4-10, 4-11, 4-13, 4-14
PCB No. 6363 (for KX-
21) and PCB No. 6370
(for KX-21N)
11 200127 CELLCHECK-400 2001/05/17 Updating the KX-21 Service Manual,
Lot No. A1001 and CELLCHECK-400 Set page, 4-1
thereafter Values used for WBC
and RBC Sensitivities
12 301A035 S/N Not Applicable. 2001/06/25 German Program ROM A-1-5
For Parts Ordered: 1KX2F (01-XX) Assy
Manufactured in (011-0021-1) has been
KX-21 Ver. Hist. 1/2 TB 200128

April 2001 and registered as PM part
thereafter for KX-21.
13 200128 S/N Not Applicable 2001/06/25 Updating KX-21 5-12, Entire Pages of
Service Manual Section 6, A-1-5, A-1-11,
A-2-1, and Alphabetical
Index, Code No. Index
KX+SM.pdf
KX-21 Ver. Hist. 2/2 TB 200128

SECTION 1 SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 NAME AND MODEL NUMBER ........................................................................................ 1
1.2 System Organization......................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Electrical Ratings .............................................................................................................. 1
1.3.1 Rated Voltage ...................................................................................................... 1
1.3.2 Line Frequency .................................................................................................... 1
1.3.3 Power Consumption ............................................................................................ 1
1.4 Dimensions and Weight.................................................................................................... 2
1.5 Intended Use..................................................................................................................... 2
1.6 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................... 2
1.6.1 Analysis and Display Range ................................................................................ 2
1.6.2 Accuracy .............................................................................................................. 3
1.6.3 Reproducibility ..................................................................................................... 3
1.6.4 Linearity ............................................................................................................... 3
1.6.5 Carryover ............................................................................................................. 4
1.6.6 Stability ................................................................................................................ 4
1.6.7 Throughput........................................................................................................... 5
1.6.8 Required Sample and Reagent Volumes ............................................................ 5
1.6.9 Graphic LCD/Panel Keyboard ............................................................................. 5
3 1.6.10 Sample ID Number.............................................................................................. 5
1.7 Functions .......................................................................................................................... 6
1.7.1 Data Storage..................................................................................................................... 6
1.7.2 Printer .................................................................................................................. 6
1.7.3 Serial Interface..................................................................................................... 6
1.7.4 Histogram Analysis .............................................................................................. 6
1.7.5 Quality Control ..................................................................................................... 7
1.7.6 Calibration............................................................................................................ 7
1.7.7 Abnormality Detection Function........................................................................... 7
1.8 Start-Up............................................................................................................................. 8
1.9 Shut Down ........................................................................................................................ 9
1.10 Maintenance ..................................................................................................................... 9
1.11 Safety Protection............................................................................................................. 10
1.12 Acoustic Noise ................................................................................................................ 10
1.13 Environmental Requirements ......................................................................................... 10
1.14 Reagents......................................................................................................................... 10
1.15 STORAGE CONDITIONS............................................................................................... 10
KX-21 S/M Revised December 2000

1.1 NAME AND MODEL NUMBER
Name: Automated Hematology Analyzer
3 Models: KX-21
KX-21N
1.2 SYSTEM ORGANIZATION

3
KX-21 KX-21N
Main Unit KX-21 Main Unit KX-21N Main Unit
1 Built-in printer (IP) Standard equipment Standard equipment
RS-232C serial interface Option Standard equipment
Graphic printer (GP/LP) --- Option
Data printer (DP) --- Option
Hand-held type bar code reader --- Option
Serial/LAN adapter --- Option
1.3 ELECTRICAL RATINGS

1.3.1 Rated Voltage
Input Voltage:
AC 100V, 117V, 220V, 230V, 240V ± 10%
Output Voltage:
DC ±15 ± 0.75 V 0.5 A
DC +100 ± 3 V 0.02 A
DC +15 ± 0.1 V 2.0 A
DC +12 ± 0.2 V 3.0 A
DC +24 ± 1.2 V 0.7 A
AC 100 V 1.2 A
Rated Voltage:
AC 100V, 117V, 220V, 240V ± 10%
The KX-21 supports two types of power supplies (100 V and 200 V).
The input voltage can be switched between 100 V and 117 V, or between 220 V and 240 V,
depending on the power supply's internal settings.
1.3.2 Line Frequency
50 Hz or 60 Hz
1.3.3 Power Consumption
230 VA or less
KX-21 S/M 1-1 Revised December 2000

1.4 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
Dimensions: 420 (W) x 355 (D) x 480 (H) mm
Weight: Approx. 28 kg (KX-21)
Approx. 30 kg (KX-21N) 3
NOTE: The acceptable dimensional difference is within 3% of the values listed above.
Protrusions are not included in the above dimensions. The acceptable weight difference
is within 10% of the values listed above.
1.5 INTENDED USE

The KX-21 is intended for in vitro diagnostic use, analyzing 18 parameters in anti-coagulated
human blood.
The anti-coagulants are EDTA-2K, EDTA-3K and EDTA-2Na. The Anti-coagulant volume
conforms to NCCLS standards.
1.6 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
1.6.1 Analysis and Display Range
(1) Analysis Range
WBC: 1.0 - 99.9 x 103/µL

RBC: 0.30 - 7.00 x 106/µL
HGB: 0.1 - 25.0 g/dL
HCT: 10.0 - 60.0%
PLT: 10 - 999 x 103/µL
(2) Display Range
WBC: 0 - 299.9 x 103/µL

RBC: 0 - 19.99 x 106/µL
HGB: 0.0 - 25.0 g/dL
HCT: 0.0 - 99.9%
MCV: 0.0 - 299.9 fL
MCH: 0.0 - 99.9 pg
MCHC: 0.0 - 99.9 g/dL
PLT: 0 - 1999 x 103/µL
W-SCR or LYMPH%:0 - 100.0%

W-MCR or MXD%: 0 - 100.0%
W-LCR or NEUT%: 0 - 100.0%
W-SCC or LYMPH#: 0 - 299.9 x 103/µL
W-MCC or MXD#: 0 - 299.9 x 103/µL
W-LCC or NEUT#: 0 - 299.9 x 103/µL
RDW-CV: 0.0% - 100.0%
RDW-SD: 0 - 250 fL
PDW: 0 - 40.0 fL
MPV: 0 - 40.0 fL
P-LCR: 0 - 100.0%
WBC Histogram 0 - 300 fL

RBC Histogram 0 - 250 fL
PLT Histogram 0 - 40 fL

1.6.2 Accuracy
When control blood or calibrator is analyzed 10 times consecutively, the mean difference from
the value obtained on the standard instrument should be within the following range:
• Whole Blood Mode

WBC Within ± 3% or ±0.2 x 103/µL
RBC Within ± 2% or ±0.03 x 106/µL
PLT Within ± 5% or ±10 x 103/µL
• Pre-diluted Mode
WBC Within ± 5% or ±0.3 x 103/µL
RBC Within ± 3% or ±0.05 x 106/µL
PLT Within ± 8% or ±15 x 103/µL
1.6.3 Reproducibility
When fresh normal blood or control blood is analyzed in Whole Blood mode 10 times
consecutively, the variation of coefficient under 95% confidence interval should be within the
following range:
Parameter Condition Whole Blood Mode Pre-diluted Mode

WBC WBC 4.0 x 103/µL or more 3.5% or lower 6.0% or lower
RBC RBC 4.00 x 106/µL or more 2.0% or lower 3.0% or lower
HGB 1.5% or lower 2.5% or lower
HCT 2.0% or lower 3.0% or lower
MCV 2.0% or lower 3.0% or lower
MCH 2.0% or lower 3.0% or lower
MCHC 2.0% or lower 3.0% or lower
PLT PLT 100 x 103/µL or more 6.0% or lower 9.0% or lower
W-SCR 15.0% or lower 25.0% or lower

W-MCR W-MCR 12% or more 30.0% or lower 45.0% or lower
W-LCR 15.0% or lower 25.0% or lower
W-SCC 15.0% or lower 25.0% or lower
W-MCC W-MCC 1.0 x 103/µL or mroe 30.0% or lower 45.0% or lower
W-LCC 15.0% or lower 25.0% or lower
RDW-CV 4.0% or lower 6.0% or lower

RDW-SD 4.0% or lower 6.0% or lower
PDW 12.0% or lower 18.0% or lower
MPV 5.0% or lower 7.5% or lower
P-LCR 20.0% or lower 30.0% or lower
1.6.4 Linearity
When the whole blood manual mode analysis is executed, the difference from the theoretical
value should be within the following range:
WBC: 1.0 - 99.9 x 103/µL (Within ±0.3 x 103/µL or ± 3%)

6
RBC: 0.30 - 7.00 x 10 /µL (Within ±0.03 x 106/µL or ± 3%)
HGB: 0.1 - 25.0 g/dL (Within ±0.2 g/dL or ± 2%)
HCT: 10.0 - 60.0% (Within ±1.0 HCT% or ± 3%)
PLT: 10 - 999 x 103/µL (Within ±10 x 103/µL or ± 5%)
6
(When RBC<7.00 x 10 /µL)

1.6.5 Carryover
When normal fresh blood or control blood is analyzed, the carryover rate obtained by standard
analysis should be within the following range:
WBC 3% or less
RBC 1.5% or less
HGB 1.5% or less
HCT 1.5% or less
PLT 5% or less
1.6.6 Stability
When normal fresh blood or control blood is analyzed, the stability should be within the following
range:
(1) Stability relative to Temperature
In normal fresh blood or control blood analysis, the data fluctuation while the ambient
temperature changes from 15°C to 30°C should be within the following range:
The following data are based on the assumption that the sample is analyzed within 12 hours
after collection, and that any change in the sample should be excluded from the fluctuation ratio.
WBC Within 10% or 0.05 x 103/µL

RBC Within 5%
HGB Within 5%
HCT Within 5%
PLT Within 15% or 30 x 103/µL
(2) Within-a-Day Stability
In control blood analysis of 5°C or less ambient temperature change, the data fluctuation for 24
hours after startup should be within the following range:
WBC Within 10%

RBC Within 5%
HGB Within 5%
HCT Within 5%
(3) Day-to-Day Stability
In control blood analysis of 5°C or less ambient temperature change, the data fluctuation for ten
days should be within the following range:
WBC Within 10%

RBC Within 5%
HGB Within 5%
HCT Within 5%

(4) Stability relative to Power Supply Voltage
In control blood analysis of 5°C or less ambient temperature change, the data fluctuation while
the power supply voltage changes 10% from the rated voltage should be within the following
range:
WBC Within 10%

RBC Within 5%
HGB Within 5%
HCT Within 5%
1.6.7 Throughput
Approx. 60 seconds/sample
Approx. 60 samples/hour
1.6.8 Required Sample and Reagent Volumes
Whole Blood Mode Pre-diluted Mode Shutdown

Sample Volume approx. 50 µL approx. 20 µL
(200 µL of 1:26 diluted ---
sample is aspirated.)
Diluent approx. 34 mL/sample approx. 34 mL/sample approx. 200 mL/ cycle
Lyse reagent approx. 1.0 mL/sample approx. 1.0 mL/sample approx. 5 mL/ cycle
Detergent --- --- approx. 0.3 mL/cycle
1.6.9 Graphic LCD/Panel Keyboard
1.6.9.1 Graphic LCD Panel Display

• 320 x 240 dots (dot pitch: 0.36 x 0.36 mm)
• With backlight
• Display Area: 115.17 x 86.37 mm
1.6.9.2 Graphic LCD Display Items

• Date/Time
• Sample ID No.
• Analysis results including flag
• Error messages
• Instrument status
• Service data
• Select Menu
• Analysis mode
1.6.9.3 Used Languages

• Panel Keyboard English
• LCD Display English, Chinese, or Japanese 3
*German, French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese are available on KX-21N
• Printer English
• Label English, Chinese or Japanese
1.6.10 Sample ID Number
6-digit number (KX-21)

15-digit number (KX-21N) 3

1.7 FUNCTIONS
1.7.1 Data Storage
(1) Analysis Results: 240 samples without histograms (KX-21)

300 samples with histograms (KX-21N) 3
(2) Histograms: None
(3) Quality Control Data: 60 points (in 6 files)
(4) Setting Values
(5) Maintenance Data
1) Instrument Operation Cycle Count
2) Unit Operation Cycle:
Stores the number of operations after the replacement or maintenance of
Waste Chamber, Detector and SRV.
3) Error History:
Can be output to host computer, but not displayed on LCD.
1.7.2 Printer
1.7.2.1 Built-in Printer Specifications

• Thermal printer
• Model: FTP-421MCL001 (Compatible with K-4500/F-820)
• Control board: PCB No. 6350
• Thermal paper, 60 mm width
1.7.2.2 Printed Items
IP (built-in DP GP LP
printer)
Date/Time Print Print Print Print
Sample ID No. Print Print Print Print
Analysis results including flag Print Print Print Print
Histograms Print Not print Print Not print
QC data Print Not print Print Print
QC chart Not print Not print Print Not print
Setting values Print Not print Print Not print
Service data Print Not print Not print Not print
NOTE: DP, GP and LP are available for KX-21N only. 3
1.7.3 Serial Interface
1 port of RS-232C Serial Interface is provided to output the following data to host computer.
• The latest analysis results
• Stored data
• QC data
1.7.4 Histogram Analysis
Discriminator position on the latest analysis can be manually changed.

1.7.5 Quality Control
• X Control or L-J Control
Up to 60 points of control data can be stored for 6 types of samples (in 6 files).
Up to 21 control parameters can be selected. (For N.A. market: up to 17 parameters.)
The control limit can be manually set.
Sample for quality control: EIGHTCHECK-3WP, EIGHTCHECK-EXTRA (N.A. market only),
EIGHTCHECK-C (Chinese market only) 3
1.7.6 Calibration
1.7.6.1 Customer Calibration

1) Calibration Method: Manual calibration, Auto calibration
2) Calibration Mode: Whole Blood Mode
3) Calibration Parameters: WBC, RBC, HGB, HCT, PLT (N.A. market only)
HGB, HCT (Other markets)
4) Calibration Samples: Fresh normal blood samples
SCS-1000 (N.A. market only)
1.7.6.2 Factory Calibration

Calibration is performed with the same method as the service calibration, using 3WP-
REFERENCE MATERIAL.
1.7.7 Abnormality Detection Function
1.7.7.1 Error Alerting Function

Monitors the abnormalities in the followings, and alert with error messages with alarm when
any abnormality is detected.
(1) Hydraulic System and Mechanical System

• Reagent level in the internal reservoir chambers
• Fluid level in the waste chambers
• Pressure and vacuum
• Rinse cup operation
• Others
(2) Analysis Condition

• Sampling data
• HGB detection
• Temperature
• Clog
(3) Electricity
• Sub-processor operation
• External device connection
• Built-in printer connection
• Built-in printer paper
(4) Others
• Calibration
• Quality Control

1.7.7.2 Histogram Abnormality
Monitors the abnormalities in the histograms, and add a flag to abnormal data. Refer to the
Operator’s Manual for the details.
(1) WL, RL, PL: Relative height at Lower Discriminator exceeds the preset limit.
(2) WU, RU, PU: Relative height at Upper Discriminator exceeds the preset limit.
(3) DW: The RBC histogram does not cross the 20% height level twice.
(4) MP: Two or more peaks exist in RBC or PLT histogram.
(5) T1: The trough discriminator cannot be set between SCR and MCR
populations.
(6) T2: The trough discriminator cannot be set between MCR and LCR
populations.
(7) F1, F2, F3: Relative height at the trough discriminator exceeds the preset limit.
(8) AG: Too many cells exist at WBC Lower Discriminator and lower 2 channels.
1.7.7.3 Analysis Results Abnormality
Monitors the abnormalities in the analysis results, and add a flag to abnormal data. Refer to
the Operator’s Manual for the details.
(1) + or –: An analysis result exceeded the preset Patient Mark Limit.

(2) *: An analysis result exceeded the Linearity Limit.
1.7.7.4 Imitation Reagents
Reagent specification is monitored as below.
(1) Diluent
Monitors the conductivity of diluent if it differs 10% or more compared with that of
CELLPACK.
When abnormality is detected, alert with error message “RBC Analysis Error”.
(2) Lyse reagent

Monitors WBC histogram if mono-peak or two-peak histogram is detected for 11
consecutive samples.
When abnormality are detected, alert with error message “WBC Analysis Error”.
The data reporting when abnormality is detected can be set by DIP SW in two levels:
• Level 1: The related data will not be displayed.
• Level 2: The related data will be displayed with an asterisk (*).
1.8 START-UP
(1) System Check including position initialization of mechanical parts.
(2) Auto Rinse
(3) Background Check

The background check limit is as follows: The background check can be repeated up to three
times.
WBC < 0.3 x 103/µL

RBC < 0.02 x 106/µL
HGB < 0.1 g/dL
PLT < 10 x 103/µL

1.9 SHUT DOWN
The hydraulic system is cleaned with diluted CELLCLEAN aspirated from the whole blood
pipette.
To shut down the system, press the [Shutdown] key.
1.10 MAINTENANCE
(1) Customer maintenance
1) Reagent replacement sequence
2) Auto rinse with background check sequence
3) Settings sub-menu for customer system set up
4) Waste chamber cleaning sequence
5) Transducer cleaning sequence
6) Transducer fluid draining sequence (for clog removal)
7) Status display
• HGB convert (real time)
• Pressure and vacuum (real time)
• Unit operation counter
8) Paper feed (optional built-in printer)
(2) Special Sequences (Service purpose only)

1) Clog removal
2) Setting sequence (Install)
3) Deprime sequence
4) Gain adjustment
5) Control mode
6) Calibrator mode
7) Continuous mode
8) Clog adjustment
9) Initialize/Change/Print setting values
(3) Special Sequences (Production & R&D purpose only)

1) Factory rinse sequence
2) Shipping sequence
3) Factory initialize/Factory settings
4) Raw data output
5) Debugger
(4) Test Operation (Service purpose only)

1) Diaphragm test operation
2) SV test operation
3) HC output test (optional)
4) Built-in printer output test (optional)
(5) Service Information Display (Service purpose only)

1) Temperature
2) Operation status
3) Sampling data
4) Service data
(6) Program Device

1) EEPROM (KX-21)
2) Flash memory card (KX-21N) 3

1.11 SAFETY PROTECTION
Main Unit Power Supply : Fuse
1.12 ACOUSTIC NOISE

55 dB or less
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

(1) Ambient Temperature: 15 - 30°C
(The reagent temperature should also be within this range.)
(2) Relative Humidity: 30% - 85%
(3) Atmospheric Pressure: 70 - 106 kPa
(4) Installation Condition: Avoid installation in a place where the instrument may be
exposed to direct sunlight, dust, vibration or acid.
1.14 REAGENTS
Diluent: CELLPACK
Lyse reagent: STROMATOLYSER-WH
Detergent: CELLCLEAN
NOTE: See Section 1.6.8 for reagent consumption.
1.15 STORAGE CONDITIONS

< Instrument >
(1) Ambient Temperature: between -10 and +60°C
(2) Relative Humidity: 30% - 95%, No dew condensation
(3) Atmospheric Pressure: 70 - 106 kPa
< Reagent >

Refer to the instructions on the package insert or container for the storage of each reagent.

SECTION 2 HYDRAULICS AND MECHANICAL SYSTEM
2.1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM...................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 Block Diagram (Whole Blood Mode)....................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Block Diagram (Pre-diluted Mode) .......................................................................... 2-1
2.2 ANALYSIS FLOW ............................................................................................................ 2-2

2.2.1 WBC/HGB Analysis Flow ........................................................................................ 2-2
2.2.2 RBC/PLT Analysis Flow .......................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 SAMPLE FLOW IN SRV .................................................................................................. 2-3

2.3.1 Sample Path............................................................................................................ 2-3
2.3.2 Sample Path (Whole Blood Mode).......................................................................... 2-4
2.3.3 Sample Path (Pre-diluted Mode) ............................................................................. 2-4
2.4 SOLENOID VALVE LOCATION....................................................................................... 2-5

A 2.4.1 Valve Unit Tubing Connections ............................................................................... 2-6
2.5 DIAPHRAGM PUMP LOCATION..................................................................................... 2-8
2.6 PNEUMATIC SYSTEM .................................................................................................... 2-9

2.6.1 Sample Aspiration System ...................................................................................... 2-9
2.6.2 Vacuum System ...................................................................................................... 2-9
2.6.3 Pressure System ................................................................................................... 2-10
2.7 WASTE CHAMBER TUBING......................................................................................... 2-10
2.8 RINSE CUP.................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.9 RBC DETECTOR UNIT ................................................................................................. 2-12
2.10 WBC DETECTOR UNIT ................................................................................................ 2-12
2.11 SRV UNIT....................................................................................................................... 2-13
A 2.12 HYDRAULIC FLOW DESCRIPTION ............................................................................. 2-14

2.12.1 Whole Blood Mode.............................................................................................. 2-14
2.12.2 Pre-Diluted Mode ................................................................................................ 2-56
A 2.13 PNEUMATIC & HYDRAULIC PARTS ............................................................................ 2-60
KX-21 S/M A Revised March 1999

By TB 99003
2.1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM

2.1.1 Block Diagram (Whole Blood Mode)
Figure 2-1: Whole Blood Mode Block Diagram
2.1.2 Block Diagram (Pre-diluted Mode)
Figure 2-2: Pre-diluted Mode Block Diagram
KX-21 S/M 2-1 A TB 99003

Revised March 1999
2.2 ANALYSIS FLOW
2.2.1 WBC/HGB Analysis Flow
Figure 2-3: WBC/HGB Analysis Flow
2.2.2 RBC/PLT Analysis Flow
Figure 2-4: RBC/PLT Analysis Flow (Whole Blood Mode)
KX-21 S/M 2-2 A TB 99003

Revised March 1999
Figure 2-5: RBC/PLT Analysis Flow (Prep-diluted Mode)
2.3 SAMPLE FLOW IN SRV

2.3.1 Sample Path
To DP
Diluted
WBC/HGB
blood
RBC
Whole WBC/HGB
blood
RBC
Sample
Figure 2-6: Sample Flow in SRV
KX-21 S/M 2-3 A TB 99003

Revised March 1999
2.3.2 Sample Path (Whole Blood Mode)
To DP
Sample
Figure 2-7: Sample Flow in SRV (Whole Blood Mode)
2.3.3 Sample Path (Pre-diluted Mode)
To DP
Sample
Figure 2-8: Sample Flow in SRV (Pre-diluted Mode)
KX-21 S/M 2-4 A TB 99003

Revised March 1999
2.4 SOLENOID VALVE LOCATION
Figure 2-9: Valve Location
KX-21 S/M 2-5 A TB 99003

Revised March 1999
2.4.1 Valve Unit Tubing Connections
(1) KX-21 Valve Unit A
MV No. Function MV No. Function

1-1 Waste drain, switch pressure/vacuum 6-1 RBC diluent DP fill/dispense switch
1-2 Waste drain, drive Pinch Valve 6-2 RBC diluent DP drive
2-1 Diluent fill, switch pressure/vacuum 7-1 RBC diluent line switch
2-2 Diluent fill, connect diluent line 7-2 WBC/Hgb diluent line switch
3-1 Diluent chamber pressure cut 8-1 WBC/Hgb diluent DP/lyse DP drive
3-2 Rinse cup drain, drive Pinch Valve 8-2 WBC/Hgb diluent DP switch
4 STR-WH (lyse) dispense control 8-3 WBC/Hgb lyse DP switch
5 Fill Detector Block Master Valve Assy
< Valve Unit A-1 >

2.0kg/cm 2
Diluent Detector
Chamber 250 mmHg MV Assy
WBC
PU (2.0kg/cm 2) Transducer
Diluent Detector
Air Filter Chamber MV Assy SRV
close close
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1-1 1-2 2-1 2-2 3-1 3-2 4 5 6-1 6-2 7-1 7-2 8-1 8-2 8-3
open open
Trap
Chamber Pinch Pinch Lyse
Valve Valve SRV Reagent
250
mmHg open-to-air Bottle
Waste Rinse Cup
Chamber
Waste
2.0 mL DP 2.0 mL DP 1.0 mL DP
RBC diluent WBC/Hgb WBC/Hgb
diluent lyse
Figure 2-10: Valve Unit A-1 Tubing
< Valve Unit A-2 >

close close close
9 10 11
2.0kg/cm2
9 10 11
open open open
WBC RBC Mixing SRV

Transducer Transducer Chamber
Figure 2-11: Valve Unit A-2 Tubing
KX-21 S/M 2-6 A TB 99003

Revised March 1999
(3) KX-21 Valve Unit B

12-1 Fill Rinse Cup 16 SRV rotation
12-2 SRV vacuum cut 17 RBC charging
12-3 SRV outer rinse 18 PD mode sample aspiration DP drive
13 Mixing Chamber drain 19 Supply rinse into sample aspiration line
14-1 RBC Transducer drain 20 WB mode sample aspiration DP drive
14-2 WBC Transducer drain 21-1 Air gap generation
15 Hgb Flow Cell drain 21-2 Detector DP drive for counting
2.0kg/cm2
RBC WBC HGB
Transducer Transducer Flow Cell 250
Rinse Cup mmHg
Isolation Isolation Isolation

Chamber Chamber Chamber
SRV Mixing
Chamber close
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
12-1 12-2 12-3 13 14-1 14-2 15 16 17 18 19 20 21-1 21-2
Detector
MV Assy
SRV
SRV
Diluent
Chamber
Waste
Chamber
500 µL DP 250 µL DP
SRV Drive Cylinder WBC RBC
Volumetric Volumetric
200 µL DP 50 µL DP
PD Mode WB Mode
Sample Sample
Aspiration Aspiration
Figure 2-12: Valve Unit B Tubing
KX-21 S/M 2-7 A TB 99003

Revised March 1999
2.5 DIAPHRAGM PUMP LOCATION
A Figure 2-13: Diaphragm Pump Location
KX-21 S/M 2-8 A TB 99003

Revised March 1999
2.6 PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
2 2
Pressure is only monitored for 0.5 kg/cm . (2.2 Kg/cm is not monitored.)
Vacuum is only monitored for 250 mmHg. (Vacuum source is not monitored.)
2.6.1 Sample Aspiration System
Aspiration speed is adjusted to Whole Blood mode. Tube Teflon is inserted between Whole Blood DP and
Diluted Blood DP for adjusting aspiration speed.
Tube Teflon
1.5X0.75
(2000)
A Figure 2-14: Sample Aspiration System
2.6.2 Vacuum System

KX-21 has no tank for Vacuum system therefore Polyurethane tubing is inserted between bellows and
pressure switch for stabilizing the vacuum.
Polyurethane 6X4
(1400)
A Figure 2-15: Vacuum System
KX-21 S/M 2-9 A TB 99003

Revised March 1999
2.6.3 Pressure System
2
KX-21 has no tank for pressure system therefore Teflon tubing is inserted between compressor and 0.5 kg/cm
regulator for stabilizing the pressure.
Tube Teflon
0.8X1.8
(1000)
A Figure 2-16: Pressure System
2.7 WASTE CHAMBER TUBING

Rear Panel
RBC TD chamber
WBC TD chamber
MV14-1
Rinse cup drain

(silicone F739-8) MV14-2
vacuum, pressure
MV1-1 SRV
(silicone 3X6.5) MV12-2
(SRV perimeter cleaning)
MV17 MV15
SRV
(Mixing Chamber) RBC/WBC fill HGB drain
A Figure 2-17: Waste Chamber Tubing
KX-21 S/M 2-10 A TB 99003

Revised March 1999
2.8 RINSE CUP
Rinse Cup
Waste chamber
(250 mmHg)
Rinsing
solution
WB Manual
Aspiration Pipette
A Figure 2-18: Rinsing Pipette Exterior
Rinsing solution is injected while the rinse cup is going down and any blood adhering to the pipette exterior is
aspirated into the waste chamber.
Waste chamber
(250 mmHg)
Rinsing
solution
A Figure 2-19: Rinsing WB Line
To clean the whole blood line, rinsing solution (containing whole blood) is discharged from the pipette tip and
aspirated into the waste chamber when the rinse cup reaches the lower end point. When the rinse cup goes up,
rinsing solution will not be discharged nor aspirated into the pipette.
KX-21 S/M 2-11 A TB 99003

Revised March 1999
2.9 RBC DETECTOR UNIT
A Aperture size: 75 µm
Transducer No.3 Assy
Rubber Cap No.31
Electrodes
Isolation Chamber
A Figure 2-20: RBC Detector Unit
2.10 WBC DETECTOR UNIT

A Aperture size: 100 µm
Transducer No. 8 Assy
Rubber Cap No.31
Electrodes
Isolation Chamber
A Figure 2-21: WBC Detector Unit
KX-21 S/M 2-12 A TB 99003

Revised March 1999
2.11 SRV UNIT
SRV Fixed Valve

No.28-R Assy
Sample Rotor Valve
No.17 Assy
SRV Fixed Valve

No.28-L Assy
SRV perimeter cleaning holes
WBC/HGB 78µL
(Pre-diluted Mode)
RBC 2.08µL SRV alignment holes

(Pre-diluted Mode)
RBC 4µL RBC 2nd dilution 40µL

(Whole Blood Mode)
WBC/HGB 6µL Path for HGB Blank

(Whole Blood Mode)
A Figure 2-22: SRV Unit
KX-21 S/M 2-13 A TB 99003

Revised March 1999
2.12 HYDRAULIC FLOW DESCRIPTION
Many solenoid valves inside instrument control every operation on KX-21. The solenoid
valve positions are shown in Hydraulic Diagram.
2.12.1 Whole Blood Mode

The following is the analysis flow in KX-21 Whole Blood Mode described in detail in
accordance with Timing Charts in Section 7.
Sequence 1 (0.0 - 0.5 sec.)
(1) Sample Aspiration

Pressing Start Switch activates SV20, applies vacuum on DP (Diaphragm Pump), and then
aspirates 50 µL of sample blood through Aspiration Pipette. The aspirated sample passes
through SRV (Sample Roter Valve) and waits for the volumetric dispensing afterward. SV20
is operating between 0.0 sec. and 19.5 sec. of Sequence 1.
(2) Air Bubble Removal in WBC/RBC TD (Transducer)

During Sequence 1 operation, between 0.0 sec. and 0.5 sec., SV5 is activated to apply
vacuum on Waste Chamber and fill the diluent in WBC/RBC TD. This operation enables
the air bubble remained around the aperture in the previous sequence to be removed.
KX-21 S/M 2-14 Added March 1999

(1) Draining Mixing Chamber

SV13 is activated at the timing of 0.7 sec. to open MV13, which connects Mixing Chamber
Draining line and Waste Chamber. As 250 mmHg vacuum is applied on Waste Chamber,
the liquid in Mixing Chamber flows into Waste Chamber and is drained finally. This
operation continues between 0.7 sec. and 3.0 sec.
In order to remove the remained liquid in Air Bubble Mixing line (between Non-Return Valve
and T-Joint), SV11 operates 4 times (with 0.2 sec. interval) with high speed. Once SV is
activated, it operates 3 times continuously to avoid Air Bubble Mixing line to be
contaminated by the waste.
(2) Draining WBC/RBC TD Chamber

At the timing of 0.7 sec., SV14 is activated to open MV14-1 and MV14-2, which connects
Draining line of WBC/RBC TD Chamber and Waste Chamber. As 250 mmHg vacuum is
applied on Waste Chamber, the liquid in TD Chamber flows into Waste Chamber and is
drained finally. This operation continues between 0.7 sec. and 3.0 sec.
and T-Joint), SV11 operates 4 times (with 0.2 sec. interval) with high speed. Once SV is
activated, it operates 3 times continuously to avoid Air Bubble Mixing line to be
contaminated by the waste. SV9 operates twice continuously between 1.2 sec. and 1.6 sec.
to avoid Air Bubble Mixing line to be contaminated by the waste.

(1) Dispensing Diluent into WBC TD Chamber

At the timing of 3.0 sec., SV8 is activated to make WBC/HGB DP dispense 2.0 mL of diluent
into WBC TD Chamber through SRV.

(1) Dispensing Sample (SRV Rotation)

SV16 is activated at the timing of 5.0 sec. to drive the piston controlling the SRV rotation.
SRV rotates in CCW direction (seeing from the left side of the instrument). This rotation
enables 4 µL of sample to be dispensed for RBC parameter analysis, and 6 µL for
WBC/HGB. The dispensed sample blood remains each Dilution line. SRV keeps this
position until the timing of 14.5 sec.
(2) Aspirating Diluent into HGB Analysis Line for Blank Measurement
SV15 operates between 5.5 sec. and 6.1 sec. to open MV15. By applying the vacuum (250
mmHg) on Waste Chamber, the diluent in WBC TD Chamber is aspirated into HGB Flow
Cell, prepared for the blank measurement afterward.

(1) RBC/PLT First Diluting

SV6 is activated at the timing of 6.2 sec. to disconnect the Diluent line from MV6-1 and
connect MV6-1 and RBC/PLT First Diluting line. RBC DP makes 2 mL of diluent with 4 µL
sample dispensed on SRV flow into Mixing Chamber. At the same time, SV11 performs the
operation of 0.2 sec. with 0.2 sec. intervals four times continuously to mix the diluted sample
with air bubbles in Mixing Chamber. The dilution ratio of the sample in Mixing Chamber is
1 : 500.
(2) Rinsing SRV and Sample Aspiration Pipette

2
SV3 operates between 7.0 sec. and 9.3 sec. to switch the air release of MV3-1 to 0.5 kg/m
pressure, which applies pressure on CELLPACK Chamber.
SV12 operates between 8.0 sec. and 8.6 sec. to open MV12-2 and MV12-3 at the same
time. CELLPACK flows through the peripheral part of SRV to rinse it by the simultaneous
application of the pressure on CELLPACK Chamber and the vacuum on Waste Chamber.
Opening MV12-1 and Pinch Valve controlled by SV3 enables CELLPACK to pass through
Rinse Cup and be aspirated into Waste Chamber. At the same time, Rinse Cup goes up
and down along Aspiration Pipette by Stepper Motor, which enables Aspiration Pipette to be
rinsed.

Sequence 4 (9.5 - 10.3 sec.)
(1) Sample Aspiration for RBC Second Diluting

SV17 is activated between 9.5 sec. and 10.3 sec. to open MV17. The first diluted sample in
Mixing Chamber passes through SRV by the vacuum (250 mmHg) in Waste Chamber to
prepare for the RBC second diluting.
(2) Reagent Aspiration by DP

At the timing of 9.3 sec., SV6 and SV8 close, and RBC DP and WBC/HGB DP aspirate 2.0
mL each of CELLPACK, and STROMATOLYSER WH DP aspirates 1.0 mL of Lyse Reagent
respectively to prepare for the next sequence.

Sequence 4 (10.3 - 12.5 sec.)
(1) Aspirating CELLPACK into CELLPACK Chamber

SV2 is activated between 10.3 sec. and 11.5 sec. to connect MV2-1 and VACUUM line,
which enables CELLPACK in the reagent cubitainer outside Main Unit to be aspirated into
CELLPACK Chamber.
(2) Draining RBC/WBC TD Chamber

SV14 is activated between 10.5 sec. and 12.5 sec. to connect MV14-1 and MV14-2 to
Waste Chamber. As the vacuum (250 mmHg) is applied on Waste Chamber, the liquid in
RBC/WBC TD Chamber flows into Waste Chamber to empty the TD Chamber. To remove
the remained liquid in Air Bubble Mixing line (between Non-Return Valve and T-Joint), SV9
and SV10 perform the open/close operation twice continuously with an interval of 0.2 sec.
(3) Draining RBC First Diluted Sample in Mixing Chamber

SV13 is activated between 10.7 sec. and 12.5 sec. to connect MV13 and Waste Chamber.
As the vacuum (250 mmHg) is applied on Waste Chamber, the RBC first diluted sample in
Mixing Chamber flows into Waste Chamber to empty Mixing Chamber. To remove the
remained liquid in Air Bubble Mixing line (between Non-Return Valve and T-Joint), SV11
operated 3 times with high speed. The first operation is performed between 10.5 sec. and
10.7 sec. and the second and third operations are between 11.7 sec. and 12.3 sec.
respectively with an interval of 0.2 sec.

Sequence 4 (12.5 - 14.5 sec.)
(1) Draining Waste Chamber

SV1 is activated between 12.7 sec. and 14.0 sec. to release Pinch Valve controlling the
Waste Chamber drain. At the same time, MV1-1 and PRESSURE line are connected to
apply pressure on Waste Chamber to drain the waste outside instrument via the waste tube.
(2) Aspirating CELLPACK into CELLPACK Chamber

SV2 is activated between 12.5 sec. and 14.0 sec. to connect MV2-1 and VACUUM line,
which enables CELLPACK in the reagent cubitainer outside Main Unit to be aspirated into
CELLPACK Chamber.
(3) Rinsing Inside Mixing Chamber

SV6 is activated at the timing of 12.5 sec. to make RBC DP dispense 2.0 mL of CELLPACK
into Mixing Chamber and rinse RBC First Diluting line and Mixing Chamber. The other
purpose of this operation is to avoid the precipitated crystals, etc. in the remained liquid after
the previous rinsing to affect on the analysis result.
(4) WBC Diluting/Lysing

SV8 is activated at the timing of 12.5 sec. to make WBC/HGB DP dispense 2.0 mL of
CELLPACK with 6 µL of sample blood cut away by SRV via WBC Dilution line into WBC TD
Chamber. At the same time, SV4 is activated to drive STROMATOLYSER-WH DP to
dispense 1.0 mL of Lyse reagent into WBC TD Chamber.
After the diluted sample and Lyse reagent are dispensed into WBC TD Chamber, SV9
operates 10 times with an interval of 0.2 sec. from the timing of 13.5 sec. to mix the sample
with air bubble in TD Chamber. This makes the sample in WBC TD Chamber diluted by
500 times.

Sequence 5 (14.5 - 15.7 sec.)
(1) SRV Rotation

SV16 is deactivated at the timing of 14.5 sec. to make SRV rotate in the CW direction and
return to the home position.
(2) Aspirating Diluent by RBC DP

SV6 is deactivated at the timing of 14.0 sec. to enable RBC DP to aspirate 2.0 mL of
CELLPACK.

Sequence 6 (15.7 - 21.0 sec.)
(1) Rinsing Whole Blood Aspiration Line and Outside Aspiration Pipette
At the timing of 15.7 sec., the rinsing of the outside of Aspiration Pipette and the inside of
WB Aspiration line starts at the same time. SV3 is activated to switch MV3-1 to the
2
pressure of 0.5 kg/cm to apply pressure on CELLPACK Chamber. Also, the pinch valve
controlled by SV3 is released to connect WB Aspiration line and Waste Chamber. SV12 is
activated to connect MV12-1 to CELLPACK Chamber. The diluent passes through Rinse
Cup, rinses outside Aspiration Pipette and is aspirated finally into Waste Chamber by the
vacuum application.
SV19 is activated between 16.0 sec. and 20.6 sec. to connect MV19 to CELLPACK
Chamber. As the pressure is applied on CELLPACK Chamber, the diluent passes through
WB Aspiration line and SRV, and is drained from the end of Aspiration Pipette. The vacuum
on Waste Chamber makes the drained diluent passes through Rinse Cup and flow into
Waste Chamber.
(2) Rinsing SRV

SV12 is activated between 15.7 sec. and 20.5 sec. to open MV12-2 and MV12-3 at the
same time. CELLPACK flows through the peripheral part of SRV to rinse it by the
simultaneous application of the pressure in CELLPACK Chamber and the vacuum in Waste
Chamber (250 mmHg).
(3) RBC Second Diluting

SV6 is activated at the timing of 15.7 sec. to make RBC DP dispense 2.0 mL of CELLPACK
and dispense with 40 µL of 1 : 500 RBC diluted sample into RBC TD through RBC Second
Dilution line. This makes the sample in RBC TD Chamber diluted by 25000 times. SV10
performs the open/close operation eight times with an interval of 0.2 sec. between 17.0 sec.
and 19.6 sec. to mix the sample with air bubble in RBC TD Chamber.
(4) HGB Blank Convert

Blank Convert is performed between 10.0 sec. and 10.5 sec. for the diluent in HGB Flow
Cell. The operation is performed 5 times with an interval of 0.1 sec. (On blank
measurement, the diluent in the HGB Flow Cell does not flow.)

Sequence 6 (21.0 - 21.8 sec.)
(1) Reagent Aspiration by DP

At the timing of 21.0 sec., SV6 and SV8 are deactivated. RBC and WBC/HGB DPs aspirate
2.0 mL each of diluent, and STROMATOLYSER-WH DP aspirates 1.0 mL of Lyse reagent
respectively to prepare for the next sequence.

Sequence 7 (21.8 - 25.3 sec.)
(1) Removing Air in WBC/RBC TD

SV5 is activated between 21.8 sec. and 22.8 sec. to aspirate diluent by the vacuum (250
mmHg) in Waste Chamber and fill it in WBC/RBC TD. This operation is performed to
remove the air remained around the aperture in the previous sequence.
(2) Rinsing RBC Second Dilution Line

By applying vacuum (250 mmHg) on Waste Chamber, the diluent in Mixing Chamber
passes through RBC Second Dilution line and flows finally into Waste Chamber, which
enables RBC Second Dilution line to be rinsed.
(3) Sample Aspiration into HGB Flow Cell

By applying the vacuum (250 mmHg), the sample in WBC TD Chamber flows into HGB
Flow Cell.

Sequence 7 (25.3 - 37.8 sec.)
(1) RBC Counting

SV21 is activated between 25.3 sec. and the end of Sequence 8 to apply vacuum of 250
mmHg on RBC Counting DP to aspirate the sample in RBC TD Chamber and start counting.
By the aspiration of RBC Counting DP, total 250 µL of sample passing through the aperture
of the TD is counted.
(2) WBC Counting

SV21 is activated between 25.3 sec. and the end of Sequence 8 to apply vacuum of 250
mmHg on WBC Counting DP to aspirate the sample in WBC TD Chamber and start
counting. By the aspiration of WBC Counting DP, total 500 µL of sample passing through
the aperture of the TD is counted.
Sequence 8 (37.8 - 39.3 sec.)
(1) HGB A/D Convert

Detector Block detects the emitted light beams in HGB Flow Cell and performs the A/D
Convert between 38.3 sec. and 39.3 sec. This operation is performed five times with an
interval of 0.2 sec.

Sequence 9 (39.3 ~ 42.5 sec.)
(1) Clog Removal

2
At the end of Sequence 8, SV21 closes to apply 0.5 kg/m pressure on RBC/WBC Counting
DP to perform the draining operation and avoid clogs occurred during counting.
(2) Dispensing Diluent into WBC/RBC TD

SV5 is activated between 39.3 sec. and 40.0 sec. to apply vacuum of 250 mmHg on Waste
Chamber to flow the liquid in TD into Waste Chamber and fill WBC/RBC TD with clean
diluent.

SV14 is activated between 40.2 sec. and 42.5 sec. to connect MV14-1 and MV14-2 with
Waste Chamber. By applying vacuum (250 mmHg) on Waste Chamber, the liquid in
WBC/RBC TD Chamber is drained into Waste Chamber.
and T-Joint), SV9 and SV10 perform the open/close operation four times with an interval of
0.2 sec. with high speed to avoid Air Bubble Mixing line to be contaminated by the waste.

Sequence 9 (42.5 sec. - 44.0 sec.)
(1) Rinsing Second Dilution Line and RBC TD Chamber

At the timing of 42.5 sec., SV6 is activated to enable RBC DP to dispense 2.0 mL of diluent.
The diluent passes through RBC Second Dilution line and flows into RBC TD Chamber. By
this operation, the Dilution line and TD Chamber are rinsed.
(2) Rinsing WBC Dilution Line and WBC TD Chamber

At the timing of 42.5 sec., SV8 is activated to enable WBC DP to dispense 2.0 mL of diluent.
The diluent passes through WBC Dilution line and flows into WBC TD Chamber. By this
operation, the Dilution line and TD Chamber are rinsed.

(1) Reagent Aspiration

2.0 mL each of diluent to prepare for the next sequence.
(2) SRV Rotation

At the timing of 44.0 sec., SV16 is activated to drive the piston controlling the SRV rotation.
SRV rotates in the CCW direction (seeing from the left side of the instrument) to prepare for
the line rinsing. SRV keeps this position until the timing of 52.0 sec.
(3) Draining HGB Flow Cell

By applying vacuum (250 mmHg) on Waste Chamber, the diluent in WBC TD Chamber is
aspirated into HGB Flow Cell and rinses it.

(1) Rinsing WBC Dilution Line and WBC TD Chamber

At the timing of 46.5 sec., SV8 is activated to make WBC DP dispense 2.0 mL of diluent via
WBC Dilution line and flow it into WBC TD Chamber, which rinses the Dilution line and TD
Chamber.
(2) Rinsing RBC Mixing Chamber

At the timing of 46.5 sec., SV6 is activated to make RBC DP dispense 2.0 mL of diluent via
RBC First Dilution line and flow it into Mixing Chamber, which rinses the RBC First Dilution
line and Mixing Chamber.

(1) Reagent Aspiration

2.0 mL each of diluent to prepare for the next sequence.

SV14 is activated between 48.3 sec. and 50.5 sec. to connect MV14-1 and MV14-2 with
Waste Chamber. By applying vacuum (250 mmHg) on Waste Chamber, the liquid in
WBC/RBC TD Chamber is drained into Waste Chamber.

(1) Aspirating Diluent into CELLPACK Chamber

At the timing of 50.5 sec., SV2 is activated to connect MV2-1 and VACUUM line, which
enables the diluent in the reagent cubitainer outside Main Unit into CELLPACK Chamber.
This operation continues until Float Switch turns OFF.
(2) Rinsing Dilution Line in RBC/WBC Pre Diluted Mode

At the timing of 50.5 sec., SV6, SV7 and SV8 are activated to make MV7-1 and MV7-2
switch to the PD Mode. RBC and WBC/HGB DPs dispense the diluent into each of
RBC/WBC TD Chambers via each of RBC/WBC PD Mode Dilution lines respectively. This
operation enables RBC/WBC PD Mode Dilution line to be rinsed.
(3) Draining Waste Chamber

SV1 is activated between 53.5 sec. and 56.5 sec. to release Pinch Valve controlling the
draining of Waste Chamber. At the same time, MV1-1 and PRESSURE line are connected
to apply pressure on Waste Chamber to drain the waste outside Main Unit via the draining
line.

(1) Removing Air Bubble in Waste Chamber

SV3 is activated between 57.6 sec. and 58.4 sec. to apply pressure on CELLPACK
Chamber to prevent the air bubble generated at the upper part of the chamber when
aspirating diluent from flowing back into the vacuum line.
(2) Aspirating Reagent

At the timing of 57.5 sec., SV6 and SV8 close, and then RBC and WBC/HGB DPs aspirate
2.0 mL each of reagent to prepare for the next sequence respectively.
(3) SRV Rotation

At the timing of 52.0 sec., SV16 is deactivated and SRV rotates in the CW direction to return
to the home position.
(4) Rinsing RBC/WBC Count Line

At the timing of 57.7 sec., SV21 is activated, and RBC/WBC Counting DPs aspirate the
diluent in the TDs and rinse RBC/WBC count lines. At the timing of 58.5 sec., SV21 closes
to drain the diluent after rinsing by the DP.

(1) Removing Air in WBC, RBC TDs

SV5 is activated between 59.2 sec. and 60.0 sec. to apply vacuum on Waste Chamber to
aspirate the diluent and fill WBC/RBC TDs with it, which enables the air remained around
the apertures in the previous sequence to be removed.
(2) Draining HGB Flow Cell

By applying the vacuum (250 mmHg) on Waste Chamber, the diluent in WBC TD Chamber
is dispensed into HGB Flow Cell to clean the Cell. At the same time, the clean diluent
remains in Flow Cell to avoid the precipitation of the crystals.
(3) Initializing Rinse Cup Position (Returning to the Home Position)

From the timing of 57.7 sec., the stepper motor is driven to return Rinse Cup to the home
position.

2.12.2 Pre-Diluted Mode
The following is only the different part of the analysis flow in KX-21 Pre-Diluted Mode from
Whole Blood Mode in accordance with Timing Charts in Section 7.
PD Mode Sequence 1 (0.0 - 19.5 sec.)
(1) Sample Aspiration

Pressing Start Switch activates SV18, applies vacuum on DP (Diaphragm Pump) for
aspirating the diluted sample, and then aspirates 200 µL of diluted sample blood through
Aspiration Pipette. The aspirated diluted sample passes through SRV (Sample Roter Valve)
and waits for the next sequence. SV18 is operating from 0.0 sec. to 19.5 sec. of Sequence
1.

PD Mode Sequence 5 (14.0 - 16.0 sec.)
(1) Diluting RBC Sample

At the timing of 14.0 sec., SV6 and SV7 are activated, which enables RBC DP to dispense
2.0. mL of diluent and 2.08 µL of 1 : 26 RBC Sample cut away by SRV into the RBC TD
Chamber through the RBC PD Mode Dilution line. This enables the sample to be diluted by
25,000 times in RBC TD Chamber.
(2) Diluting WBC Sample

At the timing of 14.0 sec., SV7 and SV8 are activated, which enables WBC DP to dispense
2.0. mL of diluent and 78 µL of WBC Sample cut away by SRV into the WBC TD Chamber.
At the same time, STOROMATOLYSER-WH DP dispenses 1.0 mL of Lyse reagent into
WBC TD Chamber, which enables the sample to be diluted by 10,000 times in WBC TD
Chamber.

2.13 PNEUMATIC & HYDRAULIC PARTS
Pneumatic Controls are used to regulate the air-flow, and to change the direction of flow.
Name & Symbol Figures Used for
Regulator Regulator is used to regulate airflow

rate, which is adjusted by turning the
Adjustment Knob.
Only on regulator, which is shown in
left figure, is used in the KX-21. This
regulator is used to regulate 2.0
2 2
kg/cm air pressure into 0.5 kg/cm
pressure with an air filter and auto
draining mechanism.
Non-Return Valve The Non-return Valve permits

hydraulic flow in only one direction
from A to B.
No hydraulic flow will occur from B to
A.
Orifice An orifice controls the rate of airflow

or the volume of air with respect to
time. These orifices are identical to
those used in the pneumatic and
hydraulic system. There are several
kinds of orifice each of which
permits a different flow rate.
Table 2-1 Pneumatic and Hydraulic Parts (1)

Bellows The bellows unit in the KX-21 is

used to regulate the vacuum
(480 mmHg or more) into 250
mmHg. This unit consists of
bellows and small air tank. If
the inner vacuum exceeds the
mechanical pressure of bellows,
vacuum is released from its top
port. If the mechanical pressure
exceeds the inner vacuum of
bellows, vacuum increases after
the top port is closed by the
needle valve. (See below
figures.)
Two types of Solenoid valves (3-

port and 5-port type) are used in
the hydraulic system. Solenoid
Valves are driven by applying 12
VDC which are controlled by
computer program, and are
used to control the pneumatic
pressure to drive Master valves,
Air cylinder, or Air Bubble
Mixing.
Solenoid valve symbol has two

boxes in its drawing. Arrows in
these boxes indicate the status
of connection. Status (1) or (2)
shown in “Name & Symbol”
column will be switched by the
activation of solenoid valve by
the activation or deactivation of
solenoid valve respectively.

Master valves in KX-21 are used

to switch Hydraulic lines (liquid,
2
0.5 kg/cm pressure, and 480
mmHg/250 mmHg vacuum).
Two types of Master Valve (2-
port and 3-port type) are used in
the hydraulic system. Master
2
Valves are driven by 2 kg/cm
air pressure controlled by
Solenoid valves.
Master valve symbols has also

two boxes in its drawing.
Arrows and lines in these boxes
indicates hydraulic ways. Status
(1) or (2) shown in “Name &
Symbol” column will be switched
by the activation or deactivation
of master valve, respectively.
Sample Rotor Valve Sample Rotor Valve Mechanism

& is driven by the air cylinder.
Air Cylinder The air cylinder is provided with
two (A and B) ports, (A) for
pneumatic activation to rotate
the SRV counter clockwise and
the other (B) for pneumatic
deactivation to reset the SRV.
2
The 2 kg/cm pressure for these
action are supplied by a 3-port
type solenoid valve.

Diaphragm Pump Seven Diaphragm Pumps are used in

the hydraulic system. Diaphragm
2
Pumps are driven by 0.5 kg/cm air
pressure and 480 mmHg vacuum
controlled by Master valves, and
dispenses or aspirates constant
volume of liquid. Diaphragm Pumps
are drawn by left symbols in sequence
flow charts.
Diaphragm Pump has two nipples on it.

One is to connect to pneumatic system
2
(0.5 kg/cm pressure or 480 mmHg
vacuum), and the other is to hydraulic
system. Either of pressure or vacuum
is always supplied to the pneumatic
side nipple. If the vacuum is supplied
to pneumatic side nipple, the fixed
volume of liquid is aspirated into the
diaphragm pump. If the pressure
supplied, the fixed volume of liquid is
dispensed from the diaphragm pump.
Manometer Ball float manometers are located in

detector blocks, and are used to detect
constant volume of diluted sample,
which are aspirated through the
transducer aperture.
Isolation Chamber These Isolation Chambers are used to

isolate the liquid in detector block from
the remaining hydraulic line in the
system in order not to be influenced by
the external noise through the hydraulic
line.

Transducer Chamber Diluted samples of WBC or RBC are

dispensed into each transducer
chamber, mixed by air bubbles, and
constant volume of the sample is
aspirated through the aperture.
Pressure Gauge Four pressure gauges are used in the

system to check the following pressures
or vacuums.
Pneumatic unit
2
1: 2.0 kg/cm
2: 480 mmHg vacuum
Main unit
2
3: 0.5 kg/cm
4: 250 mmHg vacuum
2 2
2.0 kg/cm pressure source 2 kg/cm pressure is used to drive the
master valves and SRV air cylinder. To
make simple the hydraulic flow chart, the
symbol in the “Name & Symbol” column
is used.
Glass Chamber Glass chambers with float switch are

used as Waste Chamber, Diluent
Chamber, and lyse reagent chamber.
480mmHg or 250 mmHg vacuum is
applied into these chambers to aspirate
or prime liquid. When exhausting the
waste liquid in Waste Chamber, 0.5
2
kg/cm is applied instead of vacuum.
Float switch is provided with these
chambers to prevent overflow of these
chambers.
Relief Valve The Relief Valve releases air pressure if

the supplied air pressure exceed the
preset value.
This valve is adjusted by turning the
knurled knob.

SECTION 3 ELECTRONICS
3.1 PCB LOCATION .............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 BLOCK DIAGRAM ........................................................................................................... 3-2

3.2.1 Hardware Configuration ....................................................................................... 3-3
3 3.3 PCB NO. 2135/PCB NO.2150 (ANALOG MAIN)............................................................. 3-4

3.3.1 Function ............................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.2 Description ........................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.3 Block Diagram...................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.4 Adjustment and Test Point................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.5 Connector Pin Assigns......................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.6 Assembly Drawing ............................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.7 Differences between PCBs No. 2135 and No. 2150 ........................................... 3-9
3 3.4 PCB NO. 6363/PCB NO.6370 (MAIN CPU) .................................................................... 3-9

3.4.1 Function ............................................................................................................... 3-9
3.4.2 Description ........................................................................................................... 3-9
3.4.3 Block Diagram.................................................................................................... 3-11
3.4.4 Adjustment and Test Point................................................................................. 3-13
3.4.5 Connector Pin Assigns....................................................................................... 3-13
3.4.6 Assembly Drawing ............................................................................................. 3-18
3.5 PCB NO. 6350 (PRINTER DRIVER BOARD) ............................................................... 3-20

3.5.1 Function ............................................................................................................. 3-20
3.5.2 Description ......................................................................................................... 3-20
3.5.3 Block Diagram.................................................................................................... 3-21
3.6 POWER SUPPLY UNIT (PCB NO. 4087) ..................................................................... 3-22

3.6.1 Function ............................................................................................................. 3-22
3.6.2 Description ......................................................................................................... 3-22
3.6.4 Block Diagram.................................................................................................... 3-24
KX-21 S/M Revised June 2000

3.1 PCB LOCATION
Figure 3-1: PCB Location

3
No. Description Function
1 PCB No. 2135 (KX-21) Analog Board
PCB No. 2150 (KX-21N)
2 PCB No. 6363 (KX-21) Digital Board
PCB No. 6370 (KX-21N)
3 VS15B-5 5 V Switching Regulator
4 VS50B-12 12 V Switching Regulator
5 PCB No. 4087 Power Supply Board
6 PCB No. 6350 Printer Driver Board
KX-21 S/M 3-1 Revised June 2000

3.2 BLOCK DIAGRAM
Figure 3-2: Block Diagram 3

3.2.1 Hardware Configuration
(1) PCBs
Digital board (PCB No. 6363 (KX-21)/No. 6370 (KX-21N)) 3
Analog board (PCB No. 2135 (KX-21)/No. 2150 (KX-21N)) 3
Printer control (PCB No. 6350)
(2) Power Supply Block

AC inlet equipped with fuse holder and power switch
Noise filter
Power transformer (PT-094 or PT-095)
PCB No. 4087
Switching regulator (VS15B-5, VS50B-12)
(3) LCD
Graphics LCD (320 x 240 dots, monochrome, STN blue)
Model: LRUBL601XA
Size: 166 x 112.3 x 8.5 (mm)
LCD life: 50,000 hours min.
CLF life: 17,000 hours min. (half-life period)
(4) Built-in Printer

Thermal Printer model FTP-421MCL001
Dimensions: 110 x 60 x 40 (mm)
Head life: 50 million pulses

3.3 PCB NO. 2135/PCB NO. 2150 (Analog Main)
3.3.1 Function
PCB No. 2135 (KX-21)/ No. 2150 (KX-21N) is the analog main board. 3
Refer to Section 3.3.7 for the major differences between these two boards.
3.3.2 Description
(1) RBC/PLT Detection Circuit

Amplifies the blood signal transmitted from the RBC detector, discriminates it into RBC and PLT signals,
and then sends the peak hold signal to the digital board. The RBC/PLT circuit also internally generates
an A/D START signal for each signal and sends it to the digital board. The peak hold and A/D START
signals are transmitted as they are generated. The start and end of counting are controlled on the
digital board in accordance with the predetermined sequence.
(2) WBC Detection Circuit

Amplifies the blood signal transmitted from the WBC detector and then sends the peak hold signal to the
digital board. The WBC circuit also internally generates the A/D START signal and sends it to the digital
board. The peak hold and A/D START signals are transmitted as they are generated.
• Blood cell signal amplification method

The analog main board uses a current-responsive amplifier to detect the blood cell signal. Below is an
overview of this method.
E serves as constant power supply within the blood cell signal band, according to the operation of C.
Current/Voltage Convert
Constant Current
Supply
E I0 RTD
²I = I 0 – =I 0 –
I0 RTD + ²R RTD + ²R
²I I0 ²R
= ∴
R TD >> ²R
RTD + ²R
C ≅ I0²R = KυI0 ∴ ²R = K 1ρ(T)υ
²R RTD
RTD RTD = K 2 ρ(T)
²V = –R ƒ KυI0 = K' υ
(3) HGB Detection Circuit

Firstly converts the photodiode current signal transmitted from the HGB unit into a voltage signal and
then into a time signal. The digital board then converts the time signal into pulses. The constant-
current circuit for the LED (555 nm), light source for HGB measurement, is also included in the
configuration.
(4) Temperature Monitoring Circuit

Measures the ambient temperature in the vicinity of detectors. The thermistor temperature (TEMP) is
transmitted as an analog signal, which is then converted to a digital signal on the digital board.
(5) Clog Detection Circuit

Measures the DC voltage in detectors. The DC voltage level is transmitted as an analog signal, which
is then converted to a digital signal on the digital board.
(6) Pressure Detection

Two pressure sensing (monitoring) systems, 0.5 kg/cm2 and 250 mmHg, are adopted, using adjustment-
free pressure sensors. The sensor outputs are converted to pressure values by the formulas below.
• 0.5 kg/cm2
P = (X - 0.2)/4.41 [kg/cm2]
• 250 mmHg
V = (X - 0.2)/0.006 [mmHg]
Here, X represents sensor output (V).

3.3.3 Block Diagram
Figure 3-3: PCB No. 2135/No. 2150 Block Diagram 3
3.3.4 Adjustment and Test point
See Section 4.
3.3.5 Connector Pin Assigns
1) J7 (±15 V, DC 100V: B6PS-VH) 3

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal
1 DC 100V 4 +15 V
2 GND (DC 100V) 5 GND
3 A. GND 6 –15 V
2) J2 (AC 100V: B3PS-VH)

Pin No. Signal
1 AC 100V (H)
2 AC 100V (C)
3 A. GND
3) J3 (RBC Transducer: FFC-04LAMEP1)

1 Used to prevent connector 3 RBC. TD (+)
misconnection. 4 RBC. TD (–)
2 A. GND (Shield)

4) J4 (WBC Transducer: FFC-04LAMEP1)
1 A. GND (Shield) 3 WBC. TD (+)
2 Used to prevent connector 4 WBC. TD (–)
misconnection.
5) J5 (HGB Unit: FFC-06LBMEP1)

1 HGB. SIG 4 –
2 HGB. GND 5 A. GND
3 HGB. LED 6 A. GND
6) J6 (Thermistor: FFC-04LAMEP1)
1 TH 3 NC
2 NC 4 TH (GND)
7) J1 (PCB No. 6363: PCN10HA-44PA-2. 54DSA) 3

1A +5 V 1B +15 V
2A GND 2B –15 V
3A GND 3B P. SIG
4A GND 4B R. SIG
5A GND 5B W. SIG
6A GND 6B P. A/D. START/
7A GND 7B R. A/D. START/
8A GND 8B W. A/D. START/
9A NC 9B HGB. COUNT (Sig)
10A HGB. START (+5 V) 10B HGB. START (Sig)
11A W. TD. ON (Sig) 11B R. TD. ON (Sig)
12A W. TD. ON (+5 V) 12B R. TD. ON (+5 V)
13A CLN (Sig) 13B GND
14A GND 14B CLN (+5 V)
15A PS. 0.5 15B PS. 250
16A R. CLOG 16B TEMP
17A GND 17B W/ C;PG
18A GND 18B GND
19A NC 19B GND
20A DVR (5 V) 20B D. SDI
21A NC 21B D. CLK
22A NC 22B D. CS/

3.3.6 Assembly Drawing
Figure 3-4: PCB No. 2135 Assembly Drawing (KX-21) 3

Figure 3-5: PCB No. 2150 Assembly Drawing (KX-21N) 3

3.3.7 Differences between PCBs No. 2135 and No. 2150 3
PCB No. 2135 PCB No. 2150

HGB circuit resistance - R15: 6.8 kOhm - R15: 39 kOhm
- R16: 4.7 kOhm - R16: 8.2 kOhm
Digital potentiometer - M15: AD8403 - M15: AD7376 x 2 (pull-up resistance added)
- D2, 5: HZ5B1 - D2, 5: Not mounted
- R76, 77, 78: - R76, 77, 78: 4.7 kOhm
- Photo coupler PC910 added in D.CLK line
PCB recognition - PCB No. 6370 recognizes PCB No. 2150 by the
J1-9A pull-down signal.
3.4 PCB NO. 6363/PCB NO. 6370 (Main CPU)

3.4.1 Function
PCB No. 6363 (KX-21)/ No. 6370 (KX-21N) is the CPU board that controls the Main Unit. 3
3.4.2 Description
(1) Main Memory (CPU)

The MC68306 (Motorola) is used as the MPU. Core processor is the equivalent of the MC68EC000.
The operation clock is 16.67 Mhz.
Contains DRAM Controller, Interruption Controller, Chip Select, 16-bit Timer, 2 channels of Serial
Communication Ports, and max. 16 channels of Parallel I/O Ports.
2 Mbytes DRAM is used (extendable up to 4 Mbytes) for work memory. No wait-state access (speed
grade requirement: 70 ns or higher). DRAM controller eliminates the need for external ACK.
3 On the PCB No.6370, 4 Mbytes work memory is mounted.
(2) BBURAM
Nonvolatile memory (SRAM) up to 256 Kbytes is available. Used as 128-Kbyte memory using only
odd-numbered addresses for storage of analysis results, QC charts, etc.; odd-numbered addresses.
No wait-state access (speed grade requirement: 70 ns or higher). Chip select controller in MPU
eliminates the need for external ACK. (Battery life is approx. 11 years.)
3 On the PCB No.6370, 256 Kbytes memory is mounted.
NOTE: After the BBURAM is replaced, the display language will automatically be changed to
Japanese. Refer to Section 5.9.3 Factory Initialize of this manual to change the display
language.
(3) EEPROM
256 bytes memory (BR93LC56) is available for storage of preset values. BR93LC46 (128 bytes) or
BR93LC66 (512 bytes) can also be used in place of BR93LC56, using a different access method
according to the capacity. Data are inputted/output via serial interface.
3 On the PCB No.6370, 512 bytes memory is available and extendable up to 1 Mbytes.
Device Pin MPU Pin I/O* Description

CS PA0 O Chip select (“H” when selected)
SK PA1 O Serial clock (Data are verified by “ .”)
DI PA2 O Start bit, operation code, address, and write data
DO PA3 I Read data and READY/*BUSY (internal status)
*Input (I) or output (O) is defined as seen from the MPU side.

(4) Program ROM 3
1 Mbyte programmable ROM is available for KX-21 (PCB No. 6363). Chip select controller in MPU
eliminates the need for external ACK. Immediately after booting the system, ROM image is assigned to
all addresses in the MPU except for the internal register area. This is a function of the chip select
controller in the MPU. Accordingly, the internal register of the MPU must be initialized before making
access to other I/O (including work memory).
On KX-21N, 1 Mbyte flash memory card is used as the program source.
(5) HGB Counter (82C54)

Counts the number of 1-MHz pulses upon entry of external gate signal to determine the HGB value. It
also outputs base clock signal to reduce the motor current.
(6) A/D Converter (ADC0848)

This converter has eight 8-bit channels for sensing pressure, temperature, and clogging, with a fixed
input range of 0 to +5 V. Its conversion time is approximately 40 µs. It converts data when
corresponding data are inputted to a channel. Note that conversion is terminated if reading is attempted
during conversion. Read the data after the end-of-conversion flag is detected via the parallel I/O port.
(7) PDA (SG0001-B)

Converts inputted 3 channels of analog blood cell signals (RBC, PLT, and WBC analysis results) into
digital data, which are recorded as histogram representing 128 channels.
(8) Motor Controller

4-phase stepping motor x 1 channel (constant speed driving only). Starts or stops the motor, enables or
disables the limit, and selects operating direction. Motor Counter (82C54) outputs clock signals for
motor operation and current reduction. It counts the number of motor operation steps to output end-of-
operation signal.
(9) Graphics LCD Control (SED1351)

The microcomputer system controls the monochrome graphics LCD (320 x 240). It has 256 Kbits of
SRAM as VRAM, which can store up to 3 screens of created image. 5 VDC is converted to 30 VDC for
LCD panel driving.
3 KX-21N is provided with backlight dimmer.
(10) Calendar Clock

Provided.
(11) Buzzer
Provided.
(12) Power Supply

+5 VDC (digital)
+12 VDC (SV, motor, etc.)
±15 VDC (supplied from analog board)
+5 VDC (supplied from analog board)
(13) Parallele I/F

The parallel I/O IC (PL121) has twelve 8-bit ports. 11 ports are used for either inputting or outputting; 1
port is used exclusively for outputting. PL121 also has one channel of 82C53-compatible counter
although functions are limited. 24-bit output are used for driving solenoid valve and LED, and 7-bit input
are used for sensor input.
3 1 channel is provided for output to the built-in printer (KX-21).
3 channels are provided for output to the built-in printer, to the optional data printer, and to the optional
graphic printer.
(14) Serial I/F 3

1 channel of serial interface (RS-232C) is provided for the host computer output (KX-21).
3 channels of serial interface are provided for the host computer output, hand-held type bar code reader
connection and for the network adapter (future equipment) connection (KX-21N). SM0006 is used as
the serial interface controller on PCB No. 6370.

(15) Variable reference voltage
The reference voltage used for digital data conversion can be controlled via software for 1 channel of
particle size distribution function. (Reflects calibrated values.)
3.4.3 Block Diagram
Figure 3-6: PCB No. 6363 Block Diagram (KX-21) 3

KX-21 S/M
Battery
Reset IC
Figure 3-7:
CLK
Memory
Card
EEPROM
BBU CPU WORK
RAM (MC68306) RAM
Interrupt Flash Memory
PCB No. 6370 Block Diagram (KX-21N) 3
Address Decoder/
RTC Interrupt Controller
(DRAM) Card I/F DIP
Counter Memory
SW
3-12
LCD Parallel A/D Motor HGB

SM0006 Key I/F Printer I/F Parallel OUT
Controller IN Converter Controller Counter RBC
PDA
(3ch) PLT
V CH1 CH2 CH3
RS232C Buffer R Motor
A WBC
M Driver
CH1 CH2 CH3
ＤＰ
Key- Bz Sensor Pressure/
HOST BR SV STM HGB
.
0
LCD board Temp./

Revised June 2000
Built-in SW
Printer
ＧＰ Clog Monitor
Net Work Wave Form
Adapter Processor
See Section 4.
3.4.5 Connector Pin Assign
1) J1 (Flash Memory Card) (PCB No. 6370/KX-21N only) 3

1 GND 35 GND
2 D3 36 CD1b
3 D4 37 D11
4 D5 38 D12
5 D6 39 D13
6 D7 40 D14
7 CE1b 41 D15
8 A10 42 CE2b
9 OEb 43 VS1b
10 A11 44 IORDb
11 A9 45 IOWRb
12 A8 46 A17
13 A13 47 A18
14 A14 48 A19
15 WEb 49 A20
16 READY/IREQb 50 A21
17 VCC 51 VCC
18 N.C. 52 N.C.
19 A16 53 A22
20 A15 54 A23
21 A12 55 A24
22 A7 56 A25
23 A6 57 VS2b
24 A5 58 RESET
25 A4 59 WAITb
26 A3 60 N.C.(INPACKb)
27 A2 61 REGb
28 A1 62 BVD2/SPKRb
29 GND(A0) 63 BVD1/STSCHGb
30 D0 64 D8
31 D1 65 D9
32 D2 66 D10
33 WP/IOIS16b 67 CD2b
34 GND 68 GND
2) J2 (Keyboard interface) 3
1 KEYSCAN1 2 KEYSCAN2
3 KEYSCAN3 4 KEYSCAN4
5 KEYDATA0 6 KEYDATA1
13 N.C. 14 N.C.

3) J3 (Built-in printer) 3
1 IP_PE 2 IP_ERR
3 IP_BUSY 4 IP_FEED
5 IP_INIT 6 IP_STB
7 IPDATA0 8 IPDATA1
9 IPDATA2 10 IPDATA3
15 GND 16 GND
4) J4 (Contrast adjustment volume)

1 VEE 2, 3 V0
5) J5 (LCD module) 3
1 YD 2 N.C.
3 LP 4 XSCL
5 LCDENV 6 UD0
7 UD1 8 UD2
9 UD3 10 VCC
11 GND 12 VEE
13 Vo 14 F.G.
6) J6 (LCD backlight power supply)

1 +12 V 2 GND
3 +12 V 4 GND
5 N.C. – –
7) J7 (SV output port -1)

1 +12 V 2 SV1-S
3 +12 V 4 SV2-S
5 +12 V 6 SV3-S
7 +12 V 8 SV4-S
9 +12 V 10 SV5-S
11 +12 V 12 SV6-S
13 +12 V 14 SV7-S
15 +12 V 16 SV8-S
17 +12 V 18 SV9-S
19 +12 V 20 SV10-S
21 +12 V 22 SV11-S
23 +12 V 24 SV12-S
25 +12 V 26 SV13-S
27 +12 V 28 SV14-S
29 +12 V 30 SV15-S
31 +12 V 32 SV16-S

8) J8 (SV output port -2)
1 +12 V 2 SV17-S
3 +12 V 4 SV18-S
5 +12 V 6 SV19-S
7 +12 V 8 SV20-S
9 +12 V 10 SV21-S
11 +12 V 12 SV22-S
13 +12 V 14 SV23-S
15 +12 V 16 SV24-S
9) J9 (Motor control output/Sensor input)

1 +12 V 2 +12 V
3 STM-A 4 STM-B
5 STM-#A 6 STM-#B
7 GND 8 FSW1
9 GND 10 FSW2
11 GND 12 CCW_LIM
13 GND 14 CW_LIM
15 GND 16 START_SW
17 GND 18 SW6
19 GND 20 SW7
21 VCC 22 VCC
10) J10 (Parallel Interface) (PCB No. 6363/KX-21) 3

1 *PR_STB 2 *PR_AUTOFEED
3 PRDATA0 4 *PR_ERR
5 PRDATA1 6 *PR_INIT
7 PRDATA2 8 *PR_SELIN
9 PRDATA3 10 GND
11 PRDATA4 12 GND
13 PRDATA5 14 GND
15 PRDATA6 16 GND
17 PRDATA7 18 GND
19 *PR_ACK 20 GND
21 PR_BUSY 22 GND
23 PR_PE 24 GND
25 PR_SEL 26 N.C.

J10 (Parallel Interface) (PCB No. 6370/KX-21N) 3
1 DP-STB 2 DP-FEED
3 DPDATA0 4 DP-ERR
5 DPDATA1 6 DP-INIT
7 DPDATA2 8 VCC
9 DPDATA3 10 GND
11 DPDATA4 12 GND
13 DPDATA5 14 GND
15 DPDATA6 16 GND
17 DPDATA7 18 GND
19 DP-ACK 20 GND
21 DP-BUSY 22 GND
23 DP-PE 24 GND
25 DP-SEL 26 GP-STB
27 GP-FEED 28 GPDATA0
29 GP-ERR 30 GPDATA1
31 GP-INIT 32 GPDATA2
33 GP-SELIN 34 GPDATA3
35 GND 36 GPDATA4
37 GND 38 GPDATA5
39 GND 40 GPDATA6
41 GND 42 GPDATA7
43 GND 44 GP-ACK
45 GND 46 GP-BUSY
47 GND 48 GP-PE
49 GND 50 GP-SEL
11) J11 (Serial Interface-2) (PCB No. 6363/KX-21) 3

1 N.C. 2 DSR2
3 RXD2 4 RTS2
5 TXD2 6 CTS2
7 DTR2 8 N.C.
9 GND 10 GND
J11 (Serial Interface-HOST/Network Adapter) (PCB No. 6370/KX-21N) 3

1 N.C. 2 HOST-DSR
3 HOST-RXD 4 HOST-RTS
5 HOST-TXD 6 HOST-CTS
7 HOST-DTR 8 N.C.
9 GND 10 GND
11 N.C. 12 NW-DSR
13 NW-RXD 14 NW-RTS
15 NW-TXD 16 NW-CTS
17 NW-DTR 18 N.C.
19 GND 20 GND

12) J12 (Serial Interface-1) (PCB No. 6363/KX-21) 3
1 N.C. 2 DSR1
3 RXD1 4 RTS1
5 TXD1 6 CTS1
7 DTR1 8 N.C.
9 GND 10 GND
J12 (Serial Interface-Hand held type bar code reader) (PCB No. 6370/KX-21N) 3
1 GND 2 BR-DSR
3 BR-RXD 4 BR-RTS
5 BR-TXD 6 BR-CTS
7 BR-DTR 8 GND
9 GND 10 VCC
13) J13 (Power Supply)

1 +5 V 2 GND
3 +12 V 4 GND
5 N.C. – –
14) J14 (Analog Interface)

1 (1A) A +5 V 23 (1B) A + 15 V
2 (2A) AGND 24 (2B) A – 15 V
3 (3A) AGND 25 (3B) P-PLS (A)
4 (4A) AGND 26 (4B) R-PLS (A)
5 (5A) AGND 27 (5B) W-PLS (A)
6 (6A) AGND 28 (6B) *P-ADSTART
7 (7A) AGND 29 (7B) *R-ADSTART
8 (8A) AGND 30 (8B) *W-ADSTART
9 (9A) BOARDSEL 31 (9B) *HGB_COUNT
10 (10A) VCC 32 (10B) *HGB_START-S
11 (11A) *W-TDON-S 33 (11B) *R-TDON-S
12 (12A) VCC 34 (12B) VCC
13 (13A) *CLN-S 35 (13B) AGND
14 (14A) AGND 36 (14B) VCC
15 (15A) PS_0.5 37 (15B) PS_250
16 (16A) R. CLOG 38 (16B) TEMP
17 (17A) AGND 39 (17B) W. CLOG
18 (18A) AGND 40 (18B) AGND
19 (19A) *PDATEST 41 (19B) AGND
20 (20A) VCC 42 (20B) *PM-SDI-S
21 (21A) N.C. 43 (21B) *PM-CLK-S
22 (22A) N.C. 44 (22B) *PM-CS-S
15) J15 (Battery)

1 VBATT 2 GND
16) J16 (Reserved) 3

17) J17 (Manual reset)
1 MANUAL RESET 2 GND
Figure 3-8: PCB No. 6363 Assembly Drawing (KX-21) 3

Figure 3-9: PCB No. 6370 Assembly Drawing (KX-21N) 3

3.5 PCB NO. 6350 (Printer Driver Board)
3.5.1 Function
Drives the built-in printer head. (Compatible with K-4500)
3.5.2 Description
1) CPU:
MSM65X513SS (clock 8 MHz, built-in RBM 192 bytes)
2) ROM:
The ROM capacity is 256 K bits (including the character generator)
3) Applicable printer mechanism:

Model FTP-421MCL001 (Compatible with K-4500/F-820)
4) Printer control circuit:

Interface signals are listed below (connector: CN 1)
Pin No. Signal IN/OUT Function
1 PE OUT Indicates an "out-of-paper" condition from the printer to the

CPU ("H"). The ERROR signal is "H".
2 ERROR OUT When this signal is "L" and PE is "H", the printer head is UP.
3 READY/BUSY OUT Indicates whether data reception from the printer to the CPU
is ready or not. Signal READY (reception enabled) is "L" and
signal BUSY (reception disabled) is "H".
4 FEED IN A manual paper feed signal. Enabled only when the printer
is not printing. While this signal is "L", paper is fed every dot
line.
5 INIT IN When this signal turns "L", the printer controller is reset to
the initial state and the reception buffer is cleared.
6 STROBE IN A data transfer timing signal. After this signal is received, the
system starts reading data.
7 ~ 14 DATA 0 IN Data from the CPU is read at the trailing edge of the
~ DATA 7 STROBE signal.

3.5.3 Block Diagram
I/O
circuit
Printer
mechanism
Printer
driver
Reset Motor
circuit controller
Power
supply
circuit
Figure 3-10: PCB No. 6350 Block Diagram
None.
Figure 3-11: PCB No. 6350 Assembly Drawing

3.6 POWER SUPPLY UNIT (PCB NO. 4087)
3.6.1 Function
The unit has two types of power supplies for 100-V and 200-V groups of AC lines for different markets. The
connector on the primary side of the transformer is used as voltage selector.
Configuration of the Power Supply Unit is as follows:

• AC inlet, fuse holder, and power switch
• Noise filter
• Power transformer
• Power supply board (PCB NO. 4087)
• Switching regulators (VS15B-5 and VS50B-12)
3.6.2 Description
(1) Power Input

Input voltage: 100-V group: 100 V, 117 V
200-V group: 220 V, 230 V, 240 V
Frequency: 50 Hz/60 Hz
(2) Power Output
Rated Voltage Average Current Peak Current Application

+15 VDC 0.5 A 0.7 A Analog circuits and analog 5 V
-15 VDC 0.4 A 0.5 A Analog circuits
100 VDC 10 mA 20 mA Constant-current supply
100 VAC 10 mA 20 mA Clog removal
Digital circuits, LCD drive, and control of built-
+5 VDC 2.0 A 2.1 A
in printer
+12 VDC 2.0 A 2.8 A Solenoid valve, motor, and LCD backlight
+24 VDC 0.7 A 2.7 A Printer head, motor drive
100 VAC 1.2 A 1.2 A Pneumatic unit drive
Output specifications above are guaranteed at an ambient temperature below 60 °C.
(3) Power consumption

Maximum: 250 VA
(4) Dimensions and weight

Dimensions: W x D x H = 215 x 235 x 120 (mm)
Weight: Approx. 5.2 kg
(5) Power Supply Types and Performance
Constant Voltage
Voltage Type Load Regulation Ripple Voltage
Accuracy
+15 VDC Series ±0.75 V 2% 15 mV max.
-15 VDC Series ±0.75 V 2% 15 mV max.
100 VDC Series ±3 V 2% 10 mV max.
+5 VDC Switching ±0.1 V 2% 120 mV max.
+12 VDC Switching ±0.2 V 2% 150 mV max.
+24 VDC Series ±1.2 V 2% 200 mV max.
100 VAC Transformer output — — —

(6) Power Transformer
Primary side input voltage 100 VAC, 117 V, 220 V, 230 V, 240 V
Secondary side output voltage 108 VAC, 100 V, 16.5 V - 0 - 16.5 V, 25.0 V
Capacity 279 VA
Insulation Type A
Dimension W x D x H = 152 x 128 x 75 (mm)
Weight Approx. 3.8 kg
(7) Fuses
PCB No. 4087

Circuit Symbol Part Name
F1 K19374/0.5 A
F2, 3 K19374/1.6 A
F4 K19374/3.15 A
F5 K19374/0.05 A
F6 K19374/4 A
AC inlet
Voltage Part Name
100 V, 117 V ST4 - 3. 15 A - N1
220 V, 230 V, 240 V NO. 19195 (250 V, 2A)
(8) Voltage Selection
Connect the Wiring Cord No. 2370 as below according to the required voltage.
1) 117 V
Pin 1 (light blue) and Pin 3 (brown)
J1-3
J1-1 J1-2
(117 V)
2) 220V Light Blue (Open)
Brown
Pin 1 (light blue) and Pin 4 (brown) J1-4 J1-5 J1-6
(220 V) (230 V) (240 V)
3) 230 V Brown Brown Brown
Pin 1 (light blue) and Pin 5 (brown) Figure 3-12: Wiring at Connector J1
4) 240 V
Pin 1 (light blue) and Pin 6 (brown)
See Section 4.

3.6.4 Block Diagram
1 1 DC+12V
2 2 RY1(CLOG/)
3 3 DC+12V
4 4 RY2(COMP/)
5 5
Figure 3-13: Power Supply Unit Block Diagram
Figure 3-14: PCB No. 4087 Assembly Drawing

SECTION 4 ADJUSTMENT
4.1 STANDARD SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT ..................................................................................1

4 4.1.1 WBC and RBC Sensitivity Adjustment ..........................................................................1
4.1.2 PLT Sensitivity Adjustment ............................................................................................5
4.2 HGB ADJUSTMENT .....................................................................................................................7
4.3 CLOG LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................................9
4.4 PCB CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT.......................................................................................10
10 3 4.4.1 PCB No. 2135 (KX-21)/No. 2150 (KX-21N).................................................................10
10 3 4.4.2 PCB No. 6363 (KX-21) ................................................................................................11
10 4 3 4.4.3 PCB No. 6370 (KX-21N)..............................................................................................12
4.4.4 PCB No. 4087 (Power Supply Unit).............................................................................14
4.5 PROGRAM VERSION UP PROCEDURES................................................................................15
3 4.5.1 Program Version Up (KX-21).......................................................................................15
3 4.5.2 Program Version Up (KX-21N) ....................................................................................16
4.6 MECHANICAL PARTS ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................17
4.6.1 SRV Position Adjustment.............................................................................................17
4.6.2 Rinse Cup Position Adjustment ...................................................................................18
6 4.7 PNEUMATIC ADJUSTMENT......................................................................................................19
4.7.1 Pneumatic Adjustment (KX-21N).................................................................................19
KX-21 S/M Revised February 2001

4.1 STANDARD SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT
4.1.1 WBC and RBC Sensitivity Adjustment
Required reagent: CELLCHECK-400; Part No. 814-0022-6
(1) Verify that the temperature of CELLPACK and the room temperature is within the range of 15 –
30°C.
(2) Access to the Maintenance mode.
(3) Press the Start Switch and verify WBC and RBC background counts fall the range below:
3
WBC background value ≤ 0.30 x 10 /µL
6
RBC background value ≤ 0.02 x 10 /µL
(4) Select 9. Service from SELECT menu.

Select 2. Service Seq. and 3. Gain Adjustment from the submenu.
(5) From the Gain Adjustment menu, select 1: WBC/RBC. The WBC/RBC Gain Adjustment screen
will appear.
S *Gain Adjustment*
Ready
W-MFV R-MCV
TARGET
1
2
3
MAX-MIN
RATIO(%)
RESULT
Figure 4-1: WBC/RBC Gain Adjustment Display
“*Gain Adjustment*” will appear in the system status area.

The data processing area includes following items:
TARGET: Area for entering the target value

1, 2 and 3: Area that displays the 3 analysis values
MAX-MIN: Area that displays the difference between the maximum and minimum of the 3
analysis values
RATIO(%): Area that displays the calculated compensation ratio
RESULT: Area that displays the analysis values after they are compensated
(6) Enter the TARGET values using the numeric and decimal keys.
When the Gain Adjustment screen is opened, the area in which you enter the W-MFV target
values will be reversed. Input the W-MFV and R-MCV TARGET values calculated as below:
Table 4-1: Sensitivity Adjustment Target Values 9 11

Parameter Target Value CELLCHECK-400 Lot No.
W-MFV 172.0+/-3.0 fL A5023 and thereafter
R-MCV 1.26 x (Assay value MCV of CELLCHECK-400/CC-108) ---
KX-21 S/M 4-1 Revised February 2001

The acceptable range for each parameter is 0.0 to 999.9. If the input range is exceeded, an
alarm will sound and the data entry is ignored.
For each parameter, numerals that are not significant digits will be cut off. For example, if the
WBC target is entered as 172.05, the set value will be 172.0.
[C] key functions as backspace to delete one character.
If a target value has already been entered, the previous value will be deleted upon any key entry.
(7) To confirm, either press the [ENTER] key or move to the next item with the [→] and [←] keys. If
you press the [ENTER] key, the reverse display will shift to the right.
(8) Press the [SELECT] key. The confirmation message will appear.
Confirm Data? Cont. Set Cancel
Figure 4-2: Gain Adjustment Confirmation Message
If you select [Cont.], you can continue to enter target values.

If you select [Set], the target value will be confirmed and the sample will be ready for analysis.
If you select [Cancel], gain adjustment processing will be canceled and the system will return to
the Ready Screen.
(9) Open the Detector Cover by loosening the fixing screw.
(10) Mix CELLCHECK-400 ampules vigorously, and pour it into the DB-1 sample beaker.
(11) Pour approx. 3.5 mL of CELLCHECK-400 into the WBC transducer chamber and approx. 2.5 mL
into the RBC transducer chamber.
(12) Close the Detector Cover, and press the Start Switch.
The recount analysis sequence will be performed automatically three times and the three analysis
values (1 to 3), difference between the maximum and minimum (MAX-MIN), and compensation
ratio (RATIO%) will be calculated.
S *Gain Adjustment*
Ready
W-MFV R-MCV
TARGET 172.0 134.8
1 173.5 132.8
2 175.5 131.8
3 174.5 132.3
MAX-MIN 2.0 1.0
RATIO(%) 98.6 101.9
RESULT 172.0 134.8
Execute Settings? Yes No
(13) Analysis is performed once again and displays the analysis values (RESULT).
Verify that the followings are all satisfied. (W-MFV, R-MCV)
• MAX-MIN ≤ 4 [fL]
• RATIO (%) - 100±50
• RESULT = TARGET±2 [fL]

4 Following Procedures are for Version 00-15 and before:
(14) Follow the procedures below according to the analysis values (RESULT):
1) When all the analysis values (RESULT) satisfy the values of step (13), execute the step (15).
2) When the analysis values (MAX-MIN value and RATIO value), other than RESULT value, are
satisfied, move on to the step (16) and the following steps.
3) When the analysis values (MAX-MIN value and RATIO value), other than RESULT value, are
not satisfied, go back to the step (1) and perform the sensitivity adjustment once again.
(15) Select [Yes] and press the [ENTER] key. The gain adjustment value will be updated and the
system will return to the Ready Screen. If the built-in printer is connected, the fourth analysis
values and compensation ratio will be printed.
(16) To use RESULT value for the compensation, keep it.
(17) Select [No] and press the [ENTER] key to leave from the Gain Adjustment menu. The system
will return to the Ready Screen.
(18) Press the Start Switch and verify WBC and RBC background count fall the range below:
3
WBC background value ≤ 0.30 x 10 /µL
6
RBC background value ≤ 0.02 x 10 /µL

(20) From the Gain Adjustment menu, select 1: WBC/RBC. The WBC/RBC Gain Adjustment screen
will appear.
S *Gain Adjustment*
Ready
W-MFV R-MCV
TARGET
1
2
3
MAX-MIN
RATIO(%)
RESULT
“*Gain Adjustment*” will appear in the system status area.

The data processing area includes following items:
TARGET: Area for entering the target value

1, 2 and 3: Area that displays the 3 analysis values
MAX-MIN: Area that displays the difference between the maximum and minimum of the 3
analysis values
RATIO(%): Area that displays the calculated compensation ratio
RESULT: Area that displays the analysis values after they are compensated

(21) Enter the TARGET values using the numeric and decimal keys.
When the Gain Adjustment screen is opened, the area in which you enter the W-MFV target
values will be reversed. Input the W-MFV and R-MCV TARGET values calculated as below:
2
New W-MFV TARGET = (TARGET) / RESULT (of the previous adjustment)
2
New R-MCV TARGET = (TARGET) / RESULT (of the previous adjustment)
* TARGET: W-MFV and R-MCV target values calculated in step (6)
WBC target is entered as 172.05, the set value will be 172.0.
If a target value has already been entered, the previous value will be deleted upon any key entry.
(22) To confirm, either press the [ENTER] key or move to the next item with the [ ] and [ ] keys. If
you press the [ENTER] key, the reverse display will shift to the right.
(23) Press the [SELECT] key. The confirmation message will appear.
Confirm Data? Cont. Set Cancel
Figure 4-2: Gain Adjustment Confirmation Message
If you select [Cont.], you can continue to enter target values.

If you select [Set], the target value will be confirmed and the sample will be ready for analysis.
If you select [Cancel], gain adjustment processing will be canceled and the system will return to
the Ready Screen.
(24) Open the Detector Cover by loosening the fixing screw.
(25) Mix CELLCHECK-400 ampules vigorously, and pour it into the DB-1 sample beaker.
(26) Pour approx. 3.5 mL of CELLCHECK-400 into the WBC transducer chamber and approx. 2.5 mL
into the RBC transducer chamber.
(27) Close the Detector Cover, and press the Start Switch.
The recount analysis sequence will be performed automatically three times and the three analysis
values (1 to 3), difference between the maximum and minimum (MAX-MIN), and compensation
ratio (RATIO%) will be calculated.
S *Gain Adjustment*
Ready
W-MFV R-MCV
TARGET 172.0 134.8
1 173.5 132.8
2 175.5 131.8
3 174.5 132.3
MAX-MIN 2.0 1.0
RATIO(%) 98.6 101.9
RESULT 172.0 134.8
Execute Settings? Yes No

(28) Analysis is performed once again and displays the analysis values (RESULT).
Verify that the followings are all satisfied. (W-MFV, R-MCV)
• MAX-MIN ≤ 4 [fL]
• RATIO (%) - 100±50
• RESULT = TARGET±2 [fL]
(29) Select [Yes] if the analysis values (RESULT) satisfy the standard values. The gain adjustment
value will be updated and the system will return to the Ready Screen. If the built-in printer is
connected, the fourth analysis values and compensation ratio will be printed.
4.1.2 PLT Sensitivity Adjustment
Required reagent: LATEX CALIBRATOR PLT (E); Part No. 951-0222-1
(1) Verify that the temperature of CELLPACK and the room temperature is within the range of
15 - 30°C.
(2) Remove the KX-21 Top Cover, then remove the Shield Cover No. 143 by loosening two each of
flat screw M3x8 (SUS) so that you can access the adjustment VR5 on PCB No. 2135
(KX-21)/No. 2150 (KX-21N). 3
(3) Access to the Maintenance mode.
(4) Press the Start Switch and verify PLT background count falls the range below:
3
PLT background value ² 10 x 10 /µL

(6) From the Gain Adjustment menu, select 2: PLT. The PLT Gain Adjustment screen will appear.
S *Gain Adjustment*
Ready
P-MFV
1
2
3
4
3. End
Figure 4-4: PLT Gain Adjustment Display
(7) Mix the PLT Latex Calibrator by gently swirling vial.
(8) Set the Latex Calibrator at the aspiration pipette and press the Start Switch to aspirate it.

(9) When the analysis is completed, the P-MFV result will be displayed.
S *Gain Adjustment*
Ready
P-MFV
1 12.0
2
3
Figure 4-5: Displayed the 1st Result of P-MFV
(10) Adjust the VR5 on PCB No. 2135 (KX-21)/No. 2150 (KX-21N) so that the P-MFV falls within the
acceptable range below. Turning the VR clockwise will increase the value. 3
P-MFV = (Target MFV value provided for each LATEX CALIBRATOR PLT (PM/C2)) ± 0.2
PCB No.2135 (KX-21)

/No.2150 (KX-21N)
VR5:
for PLT sensitivity adjustment
[fL]
Figure 4-6: VR5 on PCB No. 2135/No. 2150 3
(11) Press the Start Switch to recount the Latex Calibrator.

Run the recount sequence and VR adjustment three times in total.
(12) After the 4th analysis (recounting) is completed, press [1] key to continue the Latex analyses
again.
(13) Repeat the steps (7) through (11) above until the P-MFV falls into the acceptable range.
(14) After the adjustment is completed, obtain three P-MFV results by analyzing or recounting Latex
Calibrator.
(15) Calculate the average of the three results and verify that the average falls within the acceptable
range.
(16) Press [3] key to exit the adjustment program.
(17) Refit the Shield Cover No. 143 and the Top Cover.

4.2 HGB ADJUSTMENT
(1) Verify that 30 minutes or more has been passed after the power ON.
(2) Display the Status Display by pressing [SELECT] - [7] (Maintenance) - [5] (Status Display).
S *Status Display*
SEQ. NO. 12
PRESSURE 0.50
VACUUM 250
HGB CONVERT 2000
SENSOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
1 2 3 4
Figure 4-7: Status Display
(3) Adjust the VR1 on the PCB No. 2135 (KX-21)/No. 2150 (KX-21N) so that the HGB CONVERT value
falls within the range 2000±200. 3
VR1: for HGB BLANK

Convert adjustment
PCB No. 2135 (KX-21)

/No. 2150 (KX-21N)
VR2: for HGB SAMPLE adjustment
Figure 4-8: VRs for HGB Adjustment
(4) Aspirate the fresh Sysmex control blood EIGHTCHECK (Normal Level).

(5) Press [SELECT] key to stop the sequence at Sequence 7.
S *Status Display*
SEQ. NO. 7
PRESSURE 0.50
VACUUM 250
HGB CONVERT 14.2
SENSOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
1 2 3 4
Figure 4-9: Sequence Stop at Sequence 7
(6) Adjust the VR2 on the PCB No. 2135 (KX-21)/No. 2150 (KX-21N) so that the HGB CONVERT value
falls within the following range: 3
HGB CONVERT = (HGB Assay Value for EIGHTCHECK) ± 0.5 [g/dL]
(7) Press [SELECT] key to resume the sequence.

4.3 CLOG LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
(1) Select 9. Service from Select Menu.
(2) Select 2. Service Seq. from Service submenu, and select 7. Clog Adjustment. The Clog Adjustment
screen appears.
S *Clog Adjustment*
WBC CLOG 98
RBC CLOG 101
Completing automatically in 30 sec.
[SELECT] to exit.
Figure 4-10: Clog Adjustment Screen
(3) Adjust the VR6 on the PCB No. 2135 (KX-21)/No. 2150 (KX-21N) so that the WBC clog level falls
within the range: 100.0 ± 1.0. 3
(4) Adjust the VR7 on the PCB No. 2135 (KX-21)/No. 2150 (KX-21N) so that the RBC clog level falls
within the range: 100.0 ± 1.0. 3
PCB No. 2135 (KX-21)

/No.2150 (KX-21N)
VR6: for WBC clog

level adjustment
VR7: for RBC clog

level adjustment
Figure 4-11: VRs for Clog Adjustment
(5) The system returns to the Ready screen in 30 seconds.

Or press [SELECT] key to return to the Ready screen.
NOTE: If the adjustment has not been completed when the system returns to Ready, access this
program again.

4.4 PCB CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT
4.4.1 PCB No. 2135 (KX-21)/No. 2150 (KX-21N) 3
(1) HGB circuit adjustment

Adjustment VR Test Point Adjustment Item
VR1 10 TP18, TP50 Coarse BLANK adjustment
VR2 10 TP40, TP51 Coarse GAIN adjustment
(2) Reference voltage adjustment

Adjustment VR Test Point Set Value
VR8 TP17 4,100 mV ± 10 mV
(3) A/D START signal pulse width adjustment (Factory use only) 10
Item Adjustment VR Test Point Set Value
PLT VR3 TP30 6 µsec ± 10%
RBC VR5 TP29 6 µsec ± 10%
WBC VR9 TP28 6 µsec ± 10%
(4) Clog monitoring circuit adjustment

Adjustment VR Test Point Adjustment Item
VR7 10 TP21 RBC • PLT
VR6 10 TP22 WBC
(5) Sensitivity Adjustment

3
PCB No. 2135/No.2150 uses digital VRs to adjust RBC and WBC sensitivity. PLT sensitivity is adjusted by
a conventional variable VR.
(6) Test Points
TP8 WBC Sensitivity

TP9 RBC Sensitivity
TP10 PLT Sensitivity
TP11 GND (Analog)
TP12 WBC Clog Monitoring Signal
TP13 RBC Clog Monitoring Signal
NOTE: TP28, TP29 and TP30 are 1x1 mm test points.

4.4.2 PCB No. 6363 (KX-21) 3
(1) DIP Switch S1 Settings (KX-21)
C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5
Bit Function (117V) (220V, (240V) (220V,
Europe) China)
Memory initialization at start up (for factory use only)
1 ON: Start up with memory initialization OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF: Usual start up
Built-in Printer
2 ON: Connected 1 ON ON ON ON
OFF: Not connected
Host Computer A
3 ON: Connected OFF OFF OFF ON
OFF: Not connected
Quick system (production line use only)
4 ON: Connected OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF: Not connected
Histogram display in Pre-diluted Mode
5 ON: Display OFF OFF OFF ON
OFF: Not display
Analysis results display when imitation reagent is detected.
6 ON: Display analysis result with an asterisk (*)
indicating unreliable data (Level 2) ON ON ON ON
OFF: Not display the result (Level 1)
Clog monitoring in Auto Rinse
7 ON: Monitor ON ON ON ON
OFF: Do not monitor
8 Not Used (Fixed to ON) ON ON ON ON
NOTE: When replacing PCB No. 6363, execute the following procedures: 10
1) Connect the battery connector on PCB No. 6363.
2) Change the Bit 1 of DIP Switch S1 to “ON” to initialize the memory.
3) Turn the instrument power ON.
4) When the initialization is completed, the message "Entire memory area was initialized.
Turn OFF the power." will be displayed. Turn the instrument power OFF.
5) Change the Bit 1 of DIP Switch S1 to “OFF”.
6) Turn the instrument power ON to start up the instrument.
Figure 4-12: DIP SW Location (KX-21)

A Revised by ECR398E029

(2) Test Points and Adjustments (KX-21)
Adj. VR Test Point Function & Adjustment

None TP1 TP3 (GND) +5 V (digital): +5.00 ± 0.25 V
None TP4 TP6 (GND) +15 V (analog): +15.00 ± 0.75 V
None TP5 TP6 (GND) –15 V (analog): –15.00 ± 0.75 V
VR1 TP7 TP6 (GND) WBC A/D reference voltage: +3.20 ± 0.10 V
VR1 TP8 TP6 (GND) PLT A/D reference voltage: +3.20 ± 0.10 V
VR2 TP9 TP6 (GND) RBC A/D reference voltage: +3.20 ± 0.10 V
None TP10 TP3 (GND) LCD Drive: Approx. +30 V
VR* TP11 TP3 (GND) LCD Contrast Adjustment: Approx. +21-27 V
NOTE: Adjustment volume for LCD contrast is located at the bottom of Panel Keyboard.
Adjust RBC A/D reference voltage using VR2 just after the initial set up of D/A converter. (For
example when the system becomes Ready after Power ON.)
(3) LEDs (KX-21)
LED Descriptions
D1 RUN: Lights ON when ASb signal becomes effective. Flashes when a program is
running.
D2 HALT Lights ON when RESETb signal or HALPb signal is generated (1st-3rd pins of
J16 are connected.)
Also lights ON when 2nd-3rd pins of J16 are connected (ICE Connection
Mode).
NOTE: When replacing PCB No. 6363, the factory settings must be changed. Refer to Section 5.9.3
Factory Initialize of this manual for the procedures.
4.4.3 PCB No. 6370 (KX-21N) 3
DIP SW
Figure 4-13: DIP SW Location (KX-21N)

(1) DIP Switch S1 Settings (KX-21N)
C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5
Europe) China)
OFF: Usual start up
Built-in Printer
2 ON: Connected ON ON ON ON
OFF: Not connected
Host Computer
3 ON: Connected ON ON ON ON
OFF: Not connected
OFF: Not connected
Histogram display in Pre-diluted Mode
OFF: Not display
Analysis results display when imitation reagent is
6 detected.
ON: Display analysis result with an asterisk (*) ON ON ON ON
indicating unreliable data (Level 2)
OFF: Do not monitor
8 Not Used (Fixed to ON) ON ON ON ON
NOTE: When replacing PCB No. 6370, execute the following procedures: 10
1) Connect the battery connector on PCB No. 6370.
2) Change the Bit 1 of DIP Switch S1 to “ON” to initialize the memory.
3) Turn the instrument power ON.
4) When the initialization is completed, the message "Entire memory area was initialized.
Turn OFF the power." will be displayed. Turn the instrument power OFF.
5) Change the Bit 1 of DIP Switch S1 to “OFF”.
6) Turn the instrument power ON to start up the instrument.
(2) DIP Switch S2 Settings (KX-21N only)

C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5
Europe) China)
1 Not Used (Fixed to OFF) OFF OFF OFF OFF

(3) Test Points and Adjustments (KX-21N)
Adj. VR Test Point Function & Adjustment
None TP4 TP6 (GND) +15 V (analog): +15.00 ± 0.75 V
None TP5 TP6 (GND) –15 V (analog): –15.00 ± 0.75 V
None TP7 TP3 (GND) +3.3 V (digital): +3.30 ± 0.10 V
VR1 TP8 TP6 (GND) WBC/PLT A/D reference voltage: +3.20 ± 0.10 V
VR2 TP9 TP6 (GND) RBC A/D reference voltage: +3.20 ± 0.10 V
None TP10 TP3 (GND) LCD Drive: Approx. +30 V
VR* TP11 TP3 (GND) LCD Contrast Adjustment: Approx. +21-27 V
NOTE: Adjustment volume for LCD contrast is located at the bottom of Panel Keyboard.
Adjust RBC A/D reference voltage using VR2 just after the initial set up of D/A converter.
(For example when the system becomes Ready after Power ON.)
(4) LEDs (KX-21N)
LED Descriptions
D1 RUN: Lights ON when ASb signal becomes effective. Flashes when a program is
running.
D2 HALT Lights ON when RESETb signal or HALPb signal is generated (1st-3rd pins of
J16 are connected.)
Also lights ON when 2nd-3rd pins of J16 are connected (ICE Connection
Mode).
NOTE: When replacing PCB No. 6370, the factory settings must be changed. Refer to Section 5.9.3
Factory Initialize of this manual for the procedures.
4.4.4 PCB No. 4087 (Power Supply Unit)
1) PCB NO. 4087

Adjustment VR Adjustment Voltage Test Point
J6 - 5 (GND)
VR1 +100 VDC ± 3 V J6 - 6 (+100 VDC)
2) Switching Regulator VS50B-12

CN2 - 1,2 (GND)
VR1 +12 VDC ± 0.2 V CN2 - 3,4 (+12 VDC)
3) Switching Regulator VS15B-5

CN2 - 1,2 (GND)
VR1 +5 VDC ± 0.1 V CN2 - 3,4 (+5 VDC)

4.5 PROGRAM VERSION UP PROCEDURES
4.5.1 Program Version Up (KX-21) 3
Parts required: New version ROM 1KX21 ASSY

(P/N 973-3311-1: Set of 2 PROMs 1KX2F-01, 1KX2F-02)
(1) Turn the power OFF, and disconnect the power cord.
(2) Verify that reagent tubes and waste line tubes are connected properly.
(3) Remove one each of the fixing screw on right and left sides of the instrument.
(4) Open the front cover, and loosen one each of top cover fixing screw on both left and right sides.
(5) Remove the top cover.
(6) Find PROM 1KX2F-01 and PROM 1KX2F-02

on PCB No. 6363.
(7) Replace these PROMs by the new version

ones.
Make sure that PROM 1KX2F-01 is on the
left side, and PROM 1KX2F-02 is on the
right.
Also make sure that the notched side faces
down.
(8) Connect the power cord.
(9) Power ON the instrument.

(When starting up the instrument in Factory
Maintenance mode, press the Start Switch
when turning ON the power switch, and keep
it pressing until a beep sounds.)
(10) The new version number [00-XX] will be

displayed on the “Sysmex KX-21” screen. Front Right
(11) When the Power Fail error is alerted, press Figure 4-14: PROM Location
[1] key to continue.
(12) If any maintenance instruction message is displayed, execute the required maintenance program.
(Refer to the KX-21 Operator’s Manual for procedures.)
NOTE: After the Factory Initialize program is executed, or the PCB No. 6363 is replaced, the
maintenance instruction messages will be displayed at power ON. In these cases, press
[3] key to proceed the start-up without performing maintenance.
(13) When any setting change, initialization, verification is required, access the appropriate Service
Program. Refer to Section 5 for the service programs.
(14) Re-mount the top cover, and tighten the fixing screws.
Be careful not to pinch tubes and wirings when mounting the cover.

4.5.2 Program Version Up (KX-21N) 3
Parts required: New version Flash Memory Card 1KXNH ASSY (P/N: 993-2811-6)
(1) Turn the power OFF, and disconnect the power cord.
(2) Verify that reagent tubes and waste line tubes are connected properly.
(3) Remove the IC card slot cover on the rear of the instrument.
(4) When there is a Flash Memory Card

mounted, take it out by pressing the eject
button.
(5) Insert securely the Flash Memory Card with

new program.
(6) Re-mount the IC card slot cover.
(7) Connect the power cord.
(8) Power ON the instrument.

(When starting up the instrument in Factory
Maintenance mode, press the Start Switch
when turning ON the power switch, and keep
it pressing until a beep sounds.)
(9) The new version number [00-XX] will be

displayed on the “Sysmex KX-21N” screen.
(10) When the Power Fail error is alerted, press Figure 4-15: IC Card Slot (KX-21N Rear)
[1] key to continue.
(11) Program install window will be displayed.

Press [1] to store the program in the memory.
Press [2] to load the program from the program IC card to start up the instrument. This case, the
program will not be stored after the power is OFF.
(12) If any maintenance instruction message is displayed, execute the required maintenance program.
(Refer to the KX-21N Operator’s Manual for procedures.)
NOTE: After the Factory Initialize program is executed, or the PCB No. 6370 is replaced, the
maintenance instruction messages will be displayed at power ON. In these cases, press
[3] key to proceed the start-up without performing maintenance.
(13) When any setting change, initialization, verification is required, access the appropriate Service
Program. Refer to Section 5 for the service programs.

4.6 MECHANICAL PARTS ADJUSTMENT
4.6.1 SRV Position Adjustment
(1) Enter the maintenance mode. (See 5.2 ENTERING MAINTENANCE MODE.)
(2) Select SV Test Operation by pressing “Service” -> “4: Test Operation” -> “2: SV Test Operation”. (See
5.7.2 SV Test Operation.)
(3) Prepare a drill bit with 0.8 mm diameter. Verify that this drill bit can penetrate through SRV (3 pieces:
SRV Fixed Valve (L), Rotor Valve and SRV Fixed Valve (R)) at the SRV alignment hole.
If not, adjust the lower Stopper position by loosening a hex-socket fixing screw so that the drill bit will
smoothly penetrate through the SRV.
Lower Stopper
Hex-socket
Fixing Screw
SRV Alignment Hole

0.8 mm Diameter Drill
Figure 4-16: SRV in home position
(4) Rotate the SRV by entering SV No. 16 and ENTER.
(5) Verify that this drill bit can penetrate through SRV (3 pieces: SRV Fixed Valve (L), Rotor Valve and
SRV Fixed Valve (R)) at the SRV alignment hole.
If not, adjust the lower Stopper position by loosening a hex-socket fixing screw so that the drill bit will
smoothly penetrate through the SRV.

Upper Stopper
Hex-socket
Fixing Screw
SRV Alignment Hole

0.8 mm Diameter Drill
Figure 4-17: SRV in Rotate Position
(6) Rotate the SRV to home position by pressing 16 and ENTER again.
(7) Perform AUTO RINSE and verify that no background count error is reported after rinsing sequence
is completed.
(8) Perform QC and verify that the control blood data is acceptable.
4.6.2 Rinse Cup Position Adjustment
(1) Enter the maintenance mode. (See 5.2 ENTERING MAINTENANCE MODE.)
(2) Press start key and wait until rinse cup descending lowest position.
(3) Press SELECT key to stop the sequence.
(4) Verify the pipette tip is placed in the gap “A”. (View from “B” is easy to verify.)
(5) If adjustment is necessary, adjust the Rinse Cup height by loosening two screws shown in figure so
that the pipette tip will be between the gap”A”.
Fixing
Screws
Rinse Cup
B
Figure 4-18: Rinse Cup Adjustment

4.7 PNEUMATIC ADJUSTMENT
4.7.1 Pneumatic Adjustment (KX-21N)
The conversion tables for the pneumatic values are as follows. Calculate the values, of which are not in the
table, by using the formula bellow. (See KX-21N Operator’s Manual for the adjustment procedure.)
2
(1) For Pressure (kg/cm Æ MPa):
2
Pressure A (kg/cm ) x 0.0980665 = Pressure B (MPa)
2 2
Pressure A (kg/cm ) Pressure B (Mpa) Pressure A (kg/cm ) Pressure B (Mpa)
0.001 0.0001 0.665 0.0652
0.003 0.0003 0.700 0.0686
0.005 0.0005 0.701 0.0687
0.010 0.0010 0.750 0.0735
0.030 0.0029 1.000 0.0981
0.050 0.0049 1.030 0.1010
0.070 0.0069 1.050 0.1030
0.100 0.0098 1.100 0.1079
0.200 0.0196 1.500 0.1471
0.250 0.0245 1.588 0.1557
0.270 0.0265 1.600 0.1569
0.300 0.0294 1.601 0.1570
0.301 0.0295 1.700 0.1667
0.330 0.0324 1.800 0.1765
0.350 0.0343 1.900 0.1863
0.380 0.0373 2.000 0.1961
0.400 0.0392 2.010 0.1961
0.430 0.0422 2.010 0.1971
0.450 0.0441 2.100 0.2059
0.470 0.0461 2.150 0.2108
0.497 0.0487 2.200 0.2157
0.500 0.0490 2.240 0.2197
0.510 0.0500 2.250 0.2206
0.520 0.0510 2.300 0.2256
0.530 0.0520 2.400 0.2354
0.550 0.0539 2.492 0.2444
0.570 0.0559 2.500 0.2452
0.600 0.0588 2.513 0.2464
0.605 0.0593 2.533 0.2484
0.062 0.0608 2.700 0.2648
0.622 0.0610 2.800 0.2746
0.650 0.0637 3.000 0.2942

(2) For Vacuum (mmHg Æ MPa):
Vacuum A (mmHg) x 0.000133322 = Vacuum B (MPa)
Vacuum A (mmHg) Vacuum B (Mpa)

5 0.0007
10 0.0013
20 0.0027
35 0.0047
100 0.0133
150 0.0200
180 0.0240
200 0.0267
215 0.0287
220 0.0293
230 0.0307
240 0.0320
248 0.0331
250 0.0333
252 0.0336
260 0.0347
270 0.0360
280 0.0373
290 0.0387
298 0.0397
299 0.0399
300 0.0400
380 0.0507
390 0.0520
400 0.0533
415 0.0553
420 0.0560
440 0.0587
450 0.0600
500 0.0667
510 0.0680
530 0.0707
550 0.0733
600 0.0800

SECTION 5 MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
5.1 SPECIAL MODES.........................................................................................................................1
5.2 ENTERING THE MAINTENANCE MODES .................................................................................1

5.2.1 Maintenance Mode ............................................................................................................1
5.2.2 Factory Maintenance Mode ...............................................................................................1
5.2.3 Access to Maintenance Modes ..........................................................................................2
5.3 MENU CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................3
5.4 CLOG REMOVAL .........................................................................................................................4
5.5 SERVICE SEQUENCE.................................................................................................................4

5.5.1 Setting Sequence...............................................................................................................5
5.5.2 Deprime Sequence ............................................................................................................5
5.5.3 Gain Adjustment ................................................................................................................6
5.5.4 Control Mode......................................................................................................................6
5.5.5 Calibrator Mode .................................................................................................................6
5.5.6 Continuous Mode...............................................................................................................7
5.5.7 Clog Adjustment (Clog Voltage Adjustment Sequence) ....................................................7
5.6 SETTINGS ....................................................................................................................................8

5.6.1 Initialize ..............................................................................................................................8
5.6.2 Change...............................................................................................................................9
5.6.3 Sysmex Support (KX-21N software only) 3 ....................................................................13
5.6.4 Print Settings....................................................................................................................13
5.7 TEST OPERATION ....................................................................................................................14

5.7.1 DP Test Operation ...........................................................................................................14
5.7.2 SV Test Operation ...........................................................................................................14
5.7.3 HC Output Test (KX-21)/Output Test (HC) (KX-21N) 3..................................................15
5.7.4 Output Test (DP) (KX-21N only) 3 ..................................................................................15
5.7.5 Output Test (GP) (KX-21N only) 3..................................................................................15
5.7.6 IP Output Test (KX-21)/Output Test (IP) (KX-21N) 3 .....................................................15
5.8 SERVICE DATA..........................................................................................................................16

5.8.1 Status Display (Sensor & SV Status)...............................................................................17
5.9 SPECIAL SEQUENCE ...............................................................................................................18

5.9.1 Factory Rinse Sequence..................................................................................................18
5.9.2 Shipping Sequence..........................................................................................................18
5.9.3 Factory Initialize ...............................................................................................................18
5.9.4 Factory Settings ...............................................................................................................20
5.9.5 Raw Data Output .............................................................................................................20
5.9.6 Debugger .........................................................................................................................21
5.10 PRINT SETTINGS ......................................................................................................................21
KX-21 S/M Revised June 2000

5.1 SPECIAL MODES
The KX-21 program is provided with various types of special mode performing various functions.
These are the following three modes, and this section explains only modes (2) and (3).
(1) Regular Mode

This mode is for the operator routine use. It is available when the instrument is powered up in the
ordinal procedure.
(2) Maintenance Mode

This is for the Sysmex field service representatives in carrying out maintenance of the instrument.
(3) Factory Maintenance Mode

This is for adjustments, pre-shipment inspection and shipment preparation of the instrument
performed by the production staffs. Also some menu are used by R&D staffs for investigation
purpose.
5.2 ENTERING THE MAINTENANCE MODES

Use the following procedure to enter into the Maintenance mode and Factory Maintenance mode.
5.2.1 Maintenance Mode
– To enter the Maintenance mode;

Press [C] [9] [.] and [0] keys on the Panel Keyboard in this order.
S is displayed in the left corner of top line of the LCD display.
– To exit from the Maintenance mode;

Press [C] and [0] keys on the Panel Keyboard in this order.
S disappears and the system becomes the Regular mode.
5.2.2 Factory Maintenance Mode
– To enter the Factory Maintenance mode;

Press the Start Switch when turning ON the power switch, and keep it pressing until a beep sounds.
D is displayed in the left corner of top line of the LCD display.
– To exit from the Factory Maintenance mode;

Press [C] and [0] keys on the Panel Keyboard, or
Power OFF the instrument.
KX-21 S/M 5-1 Revised September 2000

5.2.3 Access to Maintenance Modes
Press [SELECT] key on the Panel Keyboard.

From the Select menu, select 9: Service by pressing [9] key.
The Service menu will appear.
D *Service*
1: Clog Removal
2: Service Seq.
3: Settings
4: Test Operation
5: Service Data
6: Special Seq.
Figure 5-1: Service Menu Display (in Factory Maintenance Mode)
“*Service*” will appear in the system status area.

Note that “6: Special Seq.” menu appears only in the Factory Maintenance mode.
Refer to the following sections for each menu.

5.3 MENU CONFIGURATION
Service 1: Clog Removal
2: Service Seq. 1: Setting Seq.

2: Deprime Seq.
3: Gain Adjustment 1: WBC/RBC
4: Control Mode 2: PLT
5: Calibrator Mode
6: Continuous Mode
7: Clog Adjustment
3: Settings 1: Initialize 1: Cycle Counter

2: Calibration
3: Stored Data
4: QC Data
5: Hardware Limit
6: Others
2: Change 1: Calibration
2: Hardware Limit
3: Print Settings 3: Parameters
3: Sysmex Support 4: Calibration Default
4: Print Settings 3
4: Test Operation 1: DP Test Operation

2: SV Test Operation 3
3: HC Output Test 3: Output Test (HC)
4: IP Output Test 4: Output Test (DP)
5: Output Test (GP)
6: Output Test (IP)
5: Service Data 1: Print
6: Special Seq. 1: Factory Rinse Seq.

2: Shipping Seq.
3: Factory Initialize
4: Factory Settings
5: Raw Data Output
6: Debugger
: PROGRAMS FOR KX-21N ONLY 3

5.4 CLOG REMOVAL
Apply voltage to the transducer apertures, and execute the clog removal sequence.
(1) Select 9: Service from Select Menu.

(2) Select 1: Clog Removal from Service submenu. The clog removal sequence starts.
S *Clog Removal*
Please wait.
Figure 5-2: Clog Removal in Progress
(3) After completion of the sequence, return to the Ready Screen.
5.5 SERVICE SEQUENCE

Service sequence include the following functions:
1. Setting sequence
2. Deprime sequence
3. Gain adjustment sequence
4. Control mode
5. Calibrator mode
6. Continuous mode
7. Clog adjustment (clog voltage adjustment sequence)

(2) Select 2: Service Seq. from Service submenu. The Service Sequence submenu appears.
S *Service Seq.*
1: Setting Seq.
2: Deprime Seq.
3: Gain Adjustment
4: Control Mode
5: Calibrator Mode
6: Continuous Mode
7: Clog Adjustment
Figure 5-3: Service Seq. Menu

5.5.1 Setting Sequence
The setting sequence follows start-up when the system is installed.
(1) From the Service Seq. menu, select 1: Setting Seq.

“Press Start switch” message will be displayed.
(2) Press the Start Switch to start the setting sequence.

Press the [SELECT] key to cancel the program execution. The system will return to the Ready
Screen.
(3) When the sequence is in progress, “Please wait.” is displayed and the progress status will
appear in the system status area.
Note that the sequence cannot be stopped after the sequence started.
(4) When the sequence is completed, the system will return to the Ready Screen.
5.5.2 Deprime Sequence
During this sequence, liquid is discharged from the hydraulic lines.
(1) From the Service Seq. menu, select 2: Deprime Seq.

Instruction message will appear in the data processing area as shown in Figure 5-4.
S *Deprime Seq.*
Disconnect Reagent tubes and

Press Start SW to Waste Reagent.
Figure 5-4: Deprime Sequence Screen
(2) Press the Start Switch to start the deprime sequence. The liquid will be deprimed.
Press the [SELECT] key to cancel the program execution. The system will return to the Ready
Screen.
(3) When the sequence is in progress, “Please wait.” is displayed and the progress status will
appear in the system status area.
Note that the sequence cannot be stopped after the sequence started.
(4) When the sequence is completed, the system will return to the Ready Screen.

5.5.3 Gain Adjustment
During this sequence, the WBC, RBC, and PLT gain (sensitivity) is adjusted.
The WBC/RBC gain can be adjusted automatically by changing the resistance of the digital control
(potentiometer) on the analog board, PCB No. 2135 (KX-21) or PCB No. 2150 (KX-21N) using standard 3
substances such as CELLCHECK-400. The gain of PLT channel is adjusted by using the analog control
volume.
(1) From the Service Seq. menu, select 3: Gain Adjustment. The Gain Adjustment menu will appear.
S *Gain Adjustment*
1: WBC/RBC
2: PLT
Figure 5-5: Gain Adjustment Menu
Refer to Section 4: Adjustment for the details.
5.5.4 Control Mode
Switch the system to Control Mode (control blood analysis mode).

In Control Mode, data analyses for control blood will be performed for normal analyses.
(1) From the Service Seq. menu, select 4: Control Mode.

In the system status area, “QC” will be displayed in reverse.
S No. 1 QC
Ready
Figure 5-6: Control Mode
(2) To exit from control mode, select 4: Control Mode from the Service Seq. menu again.
5.5.5 Calibrator Mode
Switch the system to Calibrator Mode (calibrator analysis mode).

In Calibrator Mode, data analyses for calibrator will be performed for normal analyses.
(1) From the Service Seq. menu, select 5: Calibrator Mode.

In the system status area, “CL” will be displayed in reverse.
S No. 1 CL
Ready
Figure 5-7: Calibrator Mode
(2) To exit from control mode, select 5: Calibrator Mode from the Service Seq. menu again.

5.5.6 Continuous Mode
Switch the system to Continuous Mode (continuous analysis mode).
(1) From the Service Seq. menu, select 6: Continuous Mode.

The analysis sequence will be repeated until the [SELECT] key is pressed.
(2) Press the [SELECT] key to stop the sequence and the system will enter the Ready status.
If an error that makes the analysis impossible occurs in continuous mode, the continuous sequence
will stop.
5.5.7 Clog Adjustment (Clog Voltage Adjustment Sequence)
Adjust the voltage to detect the aperture clog.
(1) From the Service Seq. menu, select 7: Clog Adjustment.

The Clog Adjustment screen will appear. The clog voltage will appear in real time on the screen.
S *Clog Adjustment*
WBC CLOG 97
RBC CLOG 97
Completing automatically in 30 sec.
[SELECT] to exit.
Figure 5-8: Clog Adjustment Screen
(2) Adjust the voltage. Refer to Section 4: Adjustment for the procedures.
(3) If you press the [SELECT] key, the Ready Screen will appear. Or after 30 seconds have
passed, the Ready Screen will automatically appear.

5.6 SETTINGS
The Settings program is used to initialize, change and print out the service setting values using the following
submenu:
1. Initialize
2. Change
3. Print Settings

(2) Select 3: Settings from Service submenu. The Settings submenu appears.
3
S *Setting* S *Setting*
1: Initialize 1: Initialize
2: Change 2: Change
3: Print Settings 3: Sysmex Support
4: Print Settings
Figure 5-9-a: Settings Menu (KX-21) Figure 5-9-b: Settings Menu (KX-21N)
5.6.1 Initialize
Initialize the system settings.
(1) From the Settings menu, select 1: Initialize.

The Initialize menu will appear.
S * Initialize*
1. Cycle Counter
2. Calibration
3. Stored Data
4. QC Data
5. Hardware Limit
6. Others
Figure 5-10: Initialize Menu

(2) Using the [↑] and [↓] keys, select the item you wish to initialize, and press [ENTER] key.
Or use the numeric keys to select item.
Table 5-1: Initialize Item

Menu Parameter to Initialize
1 Cycle Counter Instrument total cycle count
Unit operations: Waste Chamber, Detector,
SRV
2 Calibration Gain adjustment parameters
Calibration values (service)
Calibration values (user)
3 Stored Data Stored data
4 QC Data QC data
QC settings
5 Hardware Limit Hardware limits
6 Others Mark Limits
Output Settings
(3) A confirmation message will appear in the menu display area.
Initialize. OK? Yes No
Figure 5-11: Initialize Confirmation Message
If you select [Yes], the settings will be initialized and the system will return to the Ready Screen.
If you select [No], or press the [SELECT] key, the system will return to the Ready Screen without
initializing.
5.6.2 Change
Change the system settings.
(1) From the Settings menu, select 2: Change.

The Change menu will appear.
3
S *Change* S *Change*
1: Calibration 1: Calibration
2: Hardware Limit 2: Hardware Limit
3: Parameters 3: Parameters
4: Calibration Default
Figure 5-12-a: Change Menu (KX-21) Figure 5-12-b: Change Menu (KX-21N)
(2) Using the [↑] and [↓] keys, select the item you wish to change, and press [ENTER] key.
Or use the numeric keys to select item.

5.6.2.1 Calibration
(1) Using the [↑], [↓] and [ENTER] keys, move the cursor to the parameter you wish to change.
(2) Using the numeric keys and decimal key, enter the calibration value.
WBC calibration is entered as 97.55, the set value will be 97.5.

If a calibration value has already been entered, the previous value will be deleted upon any key
entry.
S * Calibration*
WBC 100.0
RBC 100.0
HGB 100.0
RBC GAIN 100.0
PLT 100.0
A W-SCR 100.0
W-MCR 100.0
RDW-SD 100.0
RDW-CV 100.0
MPV 100.0
Figure 5-13: Change Calibration Menu
(3) When the cursor is on the bottom line, pressing the [↓] key will change the displayed
parameters.
(4) If you press the [SELECT] key, the change confirmation message will appear in the menu
display area.
Execute Settings? Cont. Set Cancel
Figure 5-14: Change Confirmation Message
If you select [Cont.], you can continue to enter calibration values.

If you select [Set], the calibration value will be updated and the system will return to the Ready
Screen.
If you select [Cancel] or press the [SELECT] key, the system will return to the Ready Screen
without changing the settings.
The initial setting values will be as shown in the table below.
Table 5-2: Calibration Initial Setting Values

Parameter Initial Value Remarks
WBC-SENS 125 WBCch gain adjustment value
RBC-SENS 64 RBCch gain adjustment value
Others 100.0
A By ECR 399L057
5.6.2.2 Hardware Limit
Use this program to change Hardware Limits.
(1) Using the [↑], [↓] and [ENTER] keys, move the cursor to the item you wish to change.
(2) Using the numeric keys and decimal key, enter the limit value.
For each parameter, numerals that are not significant digits will be cut off.
If a limit value has already been entered, the previous value will be deleted upon any key entry.
S *Hardware Limit* S *Hardware Limit*
PRESS SL 0.430 PRESS SL 0.0390

PRESS SH 0.570 PRESS SH 0.0590
PRESS ML 0.380 PRESS ML 0.0300
PRESS MH 0.570 PRESS MH 0.0590
A PRESS RL 0.200 PRESS RL 0.0200
PRESS RH 0.600 PRESS RH 0.0590
VAC SL 230 VAC SL 0.0307
VAC SH 270 VAC SH 0.0360
VAC ML 100 VAC ML 0.0134
VAC MH 270 VAC MH 0.0360
6 Figure 5-15-a: Change Hardware Limits Menu (KX-21) Figure 5-15-b: Change Hardware Limits Menu (KX-21N)
(3) When the cursor is on the bottom line, pressing the [↓] key will change the displayed
parameters.
display area.
Execute Settings? Cont. Set Cancel
Figure 5-16: Change Confirmation Message
If you select [Cont.], you can continue to enter limit values.

If you select [Set], the limit value will be updated and the system will return to the Ready Screen.
6 Table 5-3: Hardware Limits Initial Set Values

Parameter Initial Value (KX-21) Initial Value (KX-21N) Remarks
PRESS SL 0.430 (kg/cm2) 0.0390 (Mpa) 6 Pressure monitor lower limit (in Ready)
PRESS SH 0.0590 (kg/cm2) 0.0590 (Mpa) 6 Pressure monitor upper limit (in Ready)
PRESS ML 0.0300 (kg/cm2) 0.0300 (Mpa) 6 Pressure monitor lower limit (during analysis)
PRESS MH 0.0590 (kg/cm2) 0.0590 (Mpa) 6 Pressure monitor upper limit (during analysis)
PRESS RL 0.0200 (kg/cm2) 0.0200 (Mpa) 6 Pressure monitor lower limit (reserve)
PRESS RH 0.0590 (kg/cm2) 0.0590 (Mpa) 6 Pressure monitor upper limit (reserve)
VAC SL 0.0307 (mmHg) 0.0307 (Mpa) 6 Vacuum monitor lower limit (in Ready)
VAC SH 0.0360 (mmHg) 0.0360 (Mpa) 6 Vacuum monitor upper limit (in Ready)
VAC ML 0.0134 (mmHg) 0.0134 (Mpa) 6 Vacuum monitor lower limit (during analysis)
VAC MH 0.0360 (mmHg) 0.0360 (Mpa) 6 Vacuum monitor upper limit (during analysis)
(Continued)
A By TB99003

Table 5-3: Hardware Limits Initial Set Values (Continued)
Parameter 6 Initial Value (KX-21 and KX-21N) Remarks
TEMP L 10.0 (°C) Temperature monitor lower limit
TEMP H 40.0 (°C) Temperature monitor upper limit
RES L 70 Electric conductivity monitor lower limit
RES H 150 Electric conductivity monitor upper limit
BLNK W 0.3 (x103/uL) WBC background limit
BLNK R 0.02 (x106/uL) RBC background limit
BLNK P 10 (x103/uL) PLT background limit
BLNK H 0.1 (g/dL) HGB background limit
CLOG W 130 WBC clog monitoring level
CLOG R 130 RBC clog monitoring level
CMP TIMER 15 (minutes) Pneumatic Unit stop time
WH LIMIT 95 (times) Lysing reagent monitoring limit
AG LMT 200 AG flag detection limit. Number of cells at
B WBC lower discriminator and the lower 2
channels.
WL MSK 95 (%) WBC count masking limit due to WL flag. The
B height of valley bottom at WBC lower
discriminator is relatively given when the
WBC histogram peak is assumed as 100%.
5.6.2.3 Parameters (Other Settings)
Use this program to set the use of Calibrator, and the report of PDW/P-LCR parameters.
(1) Using the [↑], [↓] keys, move the cursor to the item you wish to change.
(2) Pressing the [←], [→] keys alternates “Use” and “Not Use”.
3
S *Parameters* S *Parameters*
Calibrator Not Use Calibrator Not Use

PDW, P-LCR Use PDW, P-LCR Use
QC Items CBC8 QC Items Eightcheck 3WP
Figure 5-17-a: Change Hardware Limits Menu (KX-21) Figure 5-17-b: Change Hardware Limits Menu (KX-21N)
The initial values are shown in the table below.
Table 5-4-1: Parameters Initial Settings

Parameter Initial Value Remarks
Calibrator Not Use Calibrator usage
PDW, P-LCR Use PDW, P-LCR display
A QC Items CBC8 QC parameters can be selected among CBC8, USA
or ALL. See Table 5-4-2.
A By TB99003
B By ECR399B093

Table 5-4-2: QC Parameters Settings A
Selected Parameters for QC CBC8 USA ALL
Number of parameter 8 17 21
CBC8 X X X
W-SCR --- X X
W-MCR --- X X
W-LCR --- X X
W-SCC --- X X
W-MCC --- X X
W-LCC --- X X
RDW-CV --- X X
RDW-SD --- X X
MPV --- X X
PDW --- --- X
P-LCR --- --- X
W-SMV --- --- X
W-LMV --- --- X
NOTE: “USA” setting is not available on KX-21N. 3
display area.
If you select [Cont.], you can continue settings.

If you select [Set], the setting will be updated and the system will return to the Ready Screen.
5.6.2.4 Calibration Default (KX-21N software only) 3
For the future use only. Currently no function is available.
5.6.3 Sysmex Support (KX-21N software only) 3
For the future use only. Currently no function is available.
5.6.4 Print Settings
See Section 5.10.
A By TB99003

5.7 TEST OPERATION
The mechanical and output test programs are available:

(2) Select 4: Test Operation from Service submenu. The Test Operation submenu appears.
3
S *Test Operation* S *Test Operation*
1: DP Test Operation 1: DP Test Operation

2: SV Test Operation 2: SV Test Operation
3: HC Output Test 3: Output Test (HC)
4: IP Output Test 4: Output Test (DP)
5: Output Test (GP)
6: Output Test (IP)
Figure 5-18-a: Test Operation Menu (KX-21) Figure 5-18-b: Test Operation Menu (KX-21N)
5.7.1 DP Test Operation
Diaphragm Pump operation is tested.
(1) From the Test Operation submenu, select 1: DP Test Operation.

“Press Start switch” message will be displayed.
(2) Press the Start Switch to start the DP test sequence.
(3) “Please wait” message is displayed during the sequence is in progress.
(4) After the test sequence is completed, the Ready Screen is displayed.
Or press [3] or [SELECT] key to stop the sequence.
5.7.2 SV Test Operation
Solenoid Valve single operation is tested.
(1) From the Test Operation submenu, select 2: SV Test Operation. The SV Test Screen will
appear.
S * SV Test*
1 O 11 21
2 12 O 22 O
3 13 O 23 O
4 14 24 O
5 15
6 O 16 O
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 O 20 SV No. 1
Figure 5-19: SV Test Screen

(2) A circle (O) is displayed to the right of SV No. which is ON.
Input the SV No. you want to test using numeric keys, and press [ENTER].
Verify that ON/OFF is alternated for the selected SV.
(3) Press [SELECT] key to return to the Ready Screen.

The SV function will automatically reset to the status before tested.
5.7.3 HC Output Test (KX-21)/Output Test (HC) (KX-21N) 3
Send the dummy data for host communication test.
(1) From the Test Operation submenu, select 3: HC Output Test or 3: Output Test (HC).
The test data will be sent to the host computer.
(2) After the test data is output, Ready Screen will appear.
5.7.4 Output Test (DP) (KX-21N only) 3
Send the test characters to the data printer model DP-510.
(1) From the Test Operation submenu, select 4: Output Test (DP).
The DP-510 will print out the specified characters. Check the print quality and format.
5.7.5 Output Test (GP) (KX-21N only) 3
Send the test characters to the graphic printer.
(1) From the Test Operation submenu, select 5: Output Test (GP).
The graphic printer will print out the specified characters. Check the print quality and format.
5.7.6 IP Output Test (KX-21)/Output Test (IP) (KX-21N) 3
Send the test characters to the built-in printer (IP: Internal Printer).
(1) From the Test Operation submenu, select 4: IP

Output Test or 6: Output Test (IP).
The built-in printer will print out the specified
characters as shown in Figure 5-20.
Verify that there is no missing character or dot.
(2) After the test data is output, Ready Screen will

appear.
Figure 5-20: Built-in Printer Test Print

5.8 SERVICE DATA
Displays and prints out the Service Data.

(2) Select 5: Service Data from Service submenu. The Service Data Screen as shown in Figure 5-21
appears.
S * Service Data* WB
Ready
No. 1 WB 01/30 12: 34
HGB (BLNK, SAMP) 2316 2313

CLOG (W, R) 98 101
TEMP 25.6
RDW (CV, SD) 0.0 0.0

W-SMV, W-LMV 0.0 101.2
W-MFV 0.0
R-MFV 0.0
P-MFV 0.0
1: Print
Figure 5-21: Service Data Screen -1
(3) There are 4 screens of Service Data. Pressing the [←], [→] keys change the displayed screens.
On Service Data Screen -1, following items are displayed:

• HGB convert values (BLANK and SAMPLE)
• Clog monitoring voltage (WBC, RBC)
• Temperature
• Sensitivity parameters (W-MFV, R-MFV, P-MFV)
On the other three screens, WBC Sampling Data, RBC Sampling Data and PLT Sampling Data are
displayed respectively. Analysis is possible with the Sampling Data displayed on LCD.
S * Service Data* WB
Ready
No. 1 WB 01/30 12: 34
WBC 0 3 3
2 6 14
3 5 3
6 3 4
6 3 7
3 5 12
5 6 9
4 2 16
2 2 17 TOTAL 155
3 1 RATIO 12
1: Print
Figure 5-22: Service Data Screen -2 (WBC Sampling Data)
(4) If the built-in printer is used, the Service Data can be printed out. Press [1] key to print.
If the printing paper runs out or an error occurs during printing, printing will stop and the printer buffer
will be cleared.
Note that Cycle Counter is also printed out as Service Data.

5.8.1 Status Display (Sensor & SV Status)
The real-rime ON/OFF status of sensors and solenoid valves can be displayed on Status Display
screen.
(1) Select 7. Maintenance from Select Menu.
(2) Select 5. Status Display from Maintenance submenu. The Status Display screen appears.
* Status* WB
Ready
SEQ.NO. 12
PRESSURE 0.52
VACUUM 240
HGB CONVERT 550
SENSOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
1 2 3 4
Change screen with [ ] or [ ]
Figure 5-23: Status Display Screen -1
<Sensor Status>
The displayed status of each sensor is shown in the table below.
Table 5-5: Sensor Status

No. Monitored Sensor Status when REVERSED
1 Waste Chamber Float SW No liquid (float switch positions at lower end)
2 Diluent Chamber Float SW No liquid (float switch positions at lower end)
3 (Not Used)
4 Rinse Cup Limit SW Limit SW is ON (positions at lower end)
5 Start SW Start Switch is ON
6 (Not Used)
7 Lyse Reagent Float SW Lyse Reagent is connected.
(Float SW connector is connected)
<SV Status>
The displayed status of each SV is shown in the table below.
The numbers 1 through 0 on the three lines correspond to each SV as below.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 SV No. 1 through 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 SV No. 11 through 20
1 2 3 4
Compressor
Clog removal voltage control ON/OFF
Compressor Fan
SV No. 21

5.9 SPECIAL SEQUENCE
Special sequence is provided for the production and R&D use, including the submenu shown in Figure
5-23. This program can be accessed when the instrument is in the Factory Maintenance mode only.

(2) Select 6: Special Seq. from Service submenu. The Special Sequence submenu appears.
D *Special Seq.*
1: Factory Rinse Seq.

2: Shipping Seq.
3: Factory Initialize
4: Factory Settings
5: Raw Data Output
6: Debugger
Figure 5-24: Special Seq. Menu
5.9.1 Factory Rinse Sequence
Rinse the hydraulic lines using special tools, SCAT, alcohol, PVA and CELLPACK.
5.9.2 Shipping Sequence
Rinse the hydraulic lines using special tools, CELLCLEAN and RO water before shipment.
5.9.3 Factory Initialize
Initialize setting values except CALIBRATION.

When this program is executed, the data stored in BBURAM are also initialized.
The system settings are reset to Japanese settings. To change the display language, follow the
steps below.
(1) Start up the instrument in Factory Maintenance mode. The screen as shown below will be
displayed for a second. The program version number is displayed on this screen as [00-XX].
Sysmex KX-21
[00-14]
Figure 5-25: Sysmex Screen (KX-21) 3

(2) If power fail error occurred or shutdown sequence was properly executed when powered OFF,
the screen as shown below will be displayed.
停電がありました。
または、前回の使用時に[SHUTDOWN]が
実行されませんでした。
終了時にはかならず[SHUTDOWN]を
実行してください。
[１]　スタートアップを実行します。
１：続行
Figure 5-26: Power Fail Error Messages
(3) Press [1] key to continue start-up sequence. The message as below will be displayed until the
Ready Screen appears.
しばらくおまちください
Figure 5-27: Message before Ready
(4) The maintenance instruction message screens as shown below may appear.
＊定期メンテナンス＊
排液チャンバを洗浄してください。
所要時間　約１５分
洗浄後動作回数 00
前回実施日 00/00/00
１：洗浄実行３：中止
Figure 5-28: Example of Maintenance Instruction Screen
(5) Press [3] key to cancel. When the instrument becomes Ready, the message as below will be
displayed.
スタンバイ
Figure 5-29: Ready Message in Japanese

(7) Select 6: Special Seq. from Service submenu. The Special Sequence submenu appears.
(8) Select 4: Factory Settings from submenu. Refer to Section 5.9.4 below for the settings.
NOTE: After the Factory Initialize program is executed, the maintenance instruction messages
may be displayed at power ON. Press [3] key to proceed the start-up, and set the current
date/time, then reset the cycle counter. Refer to Section 5.6.1 to reset the counter.
5.9.4 Factory Settings
Set up the system automatically depending on the requirement of each shipping destination (USA,
Europe, China, Japan). The display language, units, parameters, etc. for the selected market are set
up.
(2) Select 6: Special Seq. - 4: Factory Settings from submenu. The screen as below will appear.
D * Factory Setting *
Country USA
Figure 5-30: Factory Settings Screen
(3) Press [ ] key to select the desired setting.

Japan: For Japanese market (Japanese)
USA: For American market (English)
Europe: For European and Asian Pacific market (English)
China: For Chinese market (Chinese)
Refer to the Operator’s Manual Chapter 10 for the details of each setting item. Also the factory
default setting values are listed in the last pages of Chapter 10.
The followings are the different settings between KX-21 and KX-21N.
3 Table 5-6: Different Default Settings between KX-21 and KX-21N

KX-21 KX-21N
Host Settings
Output Format K-1000 KX-21N
ID Padding --- 0 Padding
DP --- Not Use
DP Auto Output --- Off
GP/LP --- Not Use
Printer type --- Type 1 (printer of ESC/P system)
GP Auto Output --- Off
ID Reader --- Not Use
(4) Press [SELECT] and select “Set” and press [ENTER].

The built-in printer prints out the setting values and returns to the Ready screen.
5.9.5 Raw Data Output
Outputs raw data which has not been calibrated with coincidence error compensation.

5.9.6 Debugger
Checks the computer-related functions for debugging purpose.
5.10 PRINT SETTINGS

All settings made in the Service programs will be printed to the built-in printer.

(2) Select 3: Settings from Service submenu. The Settings submenu appears.
(3) From the Settings menu, select 3: Print Settings.
This is only effective if the built-in printer is connected.

If the printing paper runs out or an error occurs during printing, printing will stop and the printer buffer will be
cleared.

SECTION 6 ERROR MESSAGE and TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1. INTRODUCTION...................................................................................................................................1
6.1.1 [HELP] Key Function ................................................................................................................1
6.1.2 Action Message Screen............................................................................................................3
6.1.3 Error Code Function .................................................................................................................3
6.2 SENSOR LOCATION............................................................................................................................4
6.3. ERROR MESSAGE...............................................................................................................................5

6.3.1 Pressure ...................................................................................................................................5
2
6.3.1.1 Pressure/Vac Error [0.5 kg/cm Pressure Error] (for KX-21) 6.................................5
6.3.1.1 Pressure/Vac Error [0.05 MPa Pressure Error] (for KX-21N) 6................................5
6.3.1.2 Pressure/Vac Error [250 mmHg Vacuum Error] (for KX-21) 6 .................................6
6.3.1.2 Pressure/Vac Error [0.0333 MPa Vacuum Error] (for KX-21N) 6 .............................6
2
6.3.1.3 Pressure/Vac Error [0.5 kg/cm Pressure Error at count] (for KX-21) 6 ...................8
6.3.1.3 Pressure/Vac Error [0.05 MPa Pressure Error at count] (for KX-21N) 6 ..................8
6.3.2 Chamber.................................................................................................................................10
6.3.2.1 Waste Not Draining.................................................................................................10
6.3.2.2 Replenish Diluent....................................................................................................12
6.3.2.3 Replenish Lyse .......................................................................................................14
6.3.3 Printers ...................................................................................................................................16

6.3.3.1 No Printer Paper [Built-in Printer (IP)] (KX-21) .......................................................16
6.3.3.1 IP paper empty [ Abnormal IP] (KX-21N) 3 ...........................................................16
6.3.3.2 Printer Error [Built-in Printer (IP)] (KX-21) ..............................................................18
6.3.3.2 Error on IP [Abnormal IP] (KX-21N) 3 ...................................................................18
6.3.3.3 GP printout error (Abnormal GP) (KX-21N only) 3 .................................................20
6.3.3.4 GP Paper Empty (Abnormal GP) (KX-21N only) 3 .................................................22
6.3.3.5 DP printout error (Abnormal DP) (KX-21N only) 3..................................................24
6.3.3.6 Print Error (KX-21 only) 3 .......................................................................................26
6.3.4 Motor ......................................................................................................................................28

6.3.4.1 Rinse Motor Error [Rinse Motor Function Error] .....................................................28
6.3.5 Temperature...........................................................................................................................30
6.3.5.1 Room Temp. High...................................................................................................30
6.3.5.2 Room Temp. Low ...................................................................................................30
6.3.6 Analysis ..................................................................................................................................32

6.3.6.1 Background Error....................................................................................................32
6.3.6.2 Sampling Error [RBC Sampling Error] ....................................................................34
6.3.6.3 Sampling Error [PLT Sampling Error] .....................................................................34
6.3.6.4 Sampling Error [WBC Sampling Error] ...................................................................34
6.3.6.5 Sampling Error [RBC CCSD Noise Error]...............................................................36
6.3.6.6 Sampling Error [PLT CCSD Noise Error]................................................................36
6.3.6.7 Sampling Error [WBC CCSD Noise Error]..............................................................36
6.3.6.8 HGB Error ...............................................................................................................38
6.3.6.9 WBC Aperture Clog ................................................................................................40
6.3.6.10 RBC Aperture Clog .................................................................................................40
6.3.6.11 Analysis Error [WBC/HGB Error (Tri-modal Particle)] ............................................42
6.3.6.12 Analysis Error [Detect Sensitivity Error (Electrical Conductivity)]............................43
A NOTE: During Shutdown sequence, [RBC Aperture Clog] occurs at the same time. ...........43
KX-21 S/M Revised May 2001

6.3.7 Memory...................................................................................................................................44
6.3.7.1 Memory Error [RAM Error] ......................................................................................44
6.3.7.2 Memory Error [ROM Error] .....................................................................................44
6.3.7.3 Setup Data Error .....................................................................................................46
6.3.8 Host Output ............................................................................................................................48

6.3.8.1 HOST Comm. Error ................................................................................................48
6.3.8.2 HOST Comm. Error 2 3 .........................................................................................50
6.3.9 QC ..........................................................................................................................................52
6.3.9.1 QC Error [L-J Control Error]....................................................................................52
6.3.9.2 QC Error [ X Control Error]...................................................................................52
6.3.9.3 Calibration Error......................................................................................................54
6.3.10 Maintenance .........................................................................................................................56
6.3.10.1 Clean SRV ..............................................................................................................56
6.3.10.2 Clean W. Chamber (Clean Waste Chamber.) ........................................................58
6.3.10.3 Clean Transducer ...................................................................................................60

Alphabetical List of Error Message
2
0.5 kg/cm Pressure Error (for KX-21). .................................................................................. 6-5 6
0.05 MPa Pressure Error (for KX-21N). ................................................................................. 6-5 6
2
0.5 kg/cm Pressure Error at count (for KX-21) ..................................................................... 6-8 6
0.05 MPa Pressure Error at count (for KX-21N) .................................................................... 6-8 6
250 mmHg Vacuum Error (for KX-21) ................................................................................... 6-6 6
0.0333 MPa Vacuum Error (for KX-21N) ............................................................................... 6-6 6
[A]
Abnormal DP.......................................................................................................................... 6-24 3
Abnormal GP.......................................................................................................................... 6-20 3
Abnormal IP ........................................................................................................................... 6-16 3
Analysis .................................................................................................................................. 6-32
Analysis Error ......................................................................................................................... 6-42
[B]
Background Error ................................................................................................................... 6-32
[C]
Calibration Error ..................................................................................................................... 6-54
CCSD Noise Error.................................................................................................................. 6-36
Chamber ................................................................................................................................ 6-10
Clean SRV.............................................................................................................................. 6-56
Clean Transducer................................................................................................................... 6-60
Clean W . Chamber (Clean Waste Chamber.) ....................................................................... 6-58
[D]
Detect Sensitivity Error (Electrical Conductivity) .................................................................... 6-43
DP printout error (KX-21N)..................................................................................................... 6-24 3
[E]
Error on IP (KX-21N).............................................................................................................. 6-18 3
[G]
GP paper empty (KX-21N) ..................................................................................................... 6-22 3
GP printout error (KX-21N) .................................................................................................... 6-20 3
[H]
HGB Error .............................................................................................................................. 6-38
HOST Comm. Error ...............................................................................................................6-48
HOST Comm. Error 2 (reserved) ........................................................................................... 6-50 3
HOST Output ......................................................................................................................... 6-48
[I]
IP paper empty (KX-21N)....................................................................................................... 6-16 3
[L]
L-J Control Error..................................................................................................................... 6-52
[M]
Maintenance........................................................................................................................... 6-56
Memory Error ......................................................................................................................... 6-44
Motor ...................................................................................................................................... 6-28
[N]
No Printer Paper (KX-21) ....................................................................................................... 6-16 3

[P]
PLT CCSD Noise Error .......................................................................................................... 6-36
PLT Sampling Error................................................................................................................ 6-34
Pressure................................................................................................................................. 6-5
Pressure/Vac Error................................................................................................................. 6-5
Print Error (KX-21) ................................................................................................................. 6-26 3
Printer Error (KX-21) .............................................................................................................. 6-18 3
[Q]
QC Error................................................................................................................................. 6-52
[R]
RAM Error .............................................................................................................................. 6-44
RBC Aperture Clog ................................................................................................................ 6-40
RBC CCSD Noise Error ......................................................................................................... 6-36
RBC Sampling Error............................................................................................................... 6-34
Replenish Diluent ................................................................................................................... 6-12
Replenish Lyse....................................................................................................................... 6-14
Rinse Motor Function Error .................................................................................................... 6-28
ROM Error.............................................................................................................................. 6-44
Room Temp. High.................................................................................................................. 6-30
Room Temp. Low................................................................................................................... 6-30
[S]
Sampling Error ....................................................................................................................... 6-34
Setup Data Error .................................................................................................................... 6-46
[T]
Temperature........................................................................................................................... 6-30
[W]
Waste Not Draining................................................................................................................ 6-10
WBC Aperture Clog ............................................................................................................... 6-40
WBC CCSD Noise Error ........................................................................................................ 6-36
WBC Sampling Error.............................................................................................................. 6-34
WBC/HGB Error (Tri-modal Particle) ..................................................................................... 6-42
[X]
X Control Error.................................................................................................................... 6-52

SECTION 6 ERROR MESSAGE and TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1. INTRODUCTION
6.1.1 [HELP] Key Function
When a trouble has occurred, the warning alarm sounds and an error message is displayed on
the screen. By pressing [HELP] key on the panel keyboard, you can stop the alarm and change
over to the HELP screen that shows what action to tack against the error.
Supplementary explanation for that function is given here.
If any judgment is required when the automatic recovery is to be performed, an action message
is displayed to wait for the entry.
In the event multiple errors occur at the same time, press [HELP] key. The errors that have
occurred are listed in the order from higher priority.
*Help*
Multiple errors occurred.
Pressure/Vac Error
Waste Not Draining
Sampling Error
Room Temp. High
Rinse Motor Error
WBC Analysis Error
Press [Help] for more information.
Figure 6-1-1: HELP Screen (Error List)
Press [HELP] key again. The screen changes to the HELP screen for the error listed at top.
NOTE: • Pressing [C] key when any error occurs performs only the alarm reset.
• When any error occurs, the error message is displayed on the screen, and
pressing [HELP] key performs the automatic recovery or the action
message display.
KX-21 S/M 6-1 Revised May 2001

As for 1., 2. and 3. of the high priority order list described in the Table 6-1-1, HELP screen is
displayed without pressing [HELP] key. If there are multiple errors when exit from HELP screen,
the error list is displayed.
Table 6-1-1: Error Priority (Analysis)
Priority Error Description KX-21’s Action

1 RAM Error
ROM Error Operation disabled
Setup Data Error
2
2 0.5 kg/cm Pressure Error at count (for KX-21) Sequence suspended
0.05 Mpa Pressure Error at count (for KX-21N)
3 WBC Analysis Error Confirmation message
RBC Analysis Error
4 QC Error
53 Error on IP [Abnormal IP]
IP paper empty [Abnormal IP] Output function disabled partially
GP printout error [Abnormal GP]
GP paper empty [Abnormal GP]
Host Output Error [Host Comm. Error]
DP printout error [Abnormal DP]
2
6 0.5 kg/cm Pressure Error (for KX-21) Analysis disabled
0.05 MPa Pressure Error (for KX-21N)
250 mmHg Vacuum Error (for KX-21)
0.0333 MPa Vacuum Error (for KX-21N)
Rinse Motor Function Error Menu operation available
Waste Not Draining
Replenish Diluent
Replenish Lyse
7 HGB Error becomes READY, however,
WBC CCSD Noise Error bad effect on the next sample
RBC CCSD Noise Error
PLT CCSD Noise Error
8 WBC Aperture Clog
RBC Aperture Clog becomes READY
Temperature High
Temperature Low no bad effect on the next sample
WBC Sampling Error
RBC Sampling Error
PLT Sampling Error
Background Error
NOTE: • Errors are divided into eight groups with the priority of 1 ~ 8 (high to low).
• The errors in each group are lined up from the one with the highest priority.
Table 6-1-2: Error Priority (Others)
1 Clean SRV Maintenance message

2 Clean Waste Chamber (only at start-up)
3 Clean Transducer
– Calibration Error (only at calibration)

6.1.2 Action Message Screen
On the [Action Message] display screen, error code is displayed at the right end of the second
line from the bottom of the screen.
On the [Action Message] display screen waiting for the key entry, pressing [select] key to stop the
error recovery process and return to the ordinary screen (with the error status remained).
6.1.3 Error Code Function
Purpose: For service person to obtain the instrument status correctly over the phone.
Table 6-1-3: Error Codes
No. Error Error Description Error Code XXXXX ZZZZZ

11 Pressure 6
2
111 0.5 kg/cm Pressure Error (KX-21) 111050.XXXXX.ZZZZZ Pressure Value Sequence No.
111 0.05 MPa Pressure Error (KX-21N) 111050.XXXXX.ZZZZZ Pressure Value Sequence No.
112 250 mmHg Vacuum Error (KX-21) 112250.XXXXX.ZZZZZ Vacuum Value Sequence No.
112 0.0333 MPa Vacuum Error 112333.XXXXX.ZZZZZ Vacuum Value Sequence No.
(KX-21N)
2
119 0.5 kg/cm Pressure Error at count 119050.XXXXX.ZZZZZ Pressure Value Sequence No.
(KX-21)
119 0.05 Mpa Pressure Error at count 119050.XXXXX.ZZZZZ Pressure Value Sequence No.
(KX-21N)
12 Chamber
129 Waste Not Draining 129000.0.0 0 0
121 Replenish Diluent 121000.0.0 0 0
124 Replenish Lyse 124900.0.0 0 0
34 Printers
345 No Printer Paper (KX-21) 345020.0.0 0 0
IP paper empty (KX-21N) 3
345 Printer Error (KX-21) 345010.0.0 0 0
Error on IP (KX-21N) 3
13 Motor
131 Rinse Motor Function Error 131500.0.0 0 0
21 Temperature
212 Room Temp. High 212510.XXXXX.0 Temperature 0
212 Room Temp. Low 212520.XXXXX.0 Temperature 0
22 Analysis
221 WBC Aperture Clog 221040.XXXXX.0 Count time or 0
Clog
221 RBC Aperture Clog 221090.XXXXX.0 Count time or 0
Clog
229 Background Error 229100.XXXXX.ZZZZZ Background Value Parameter (2)
223 WBC Sampling Error 223010.0.0 0 0
223 RBC Sampling Error 223020.0.0 0 0
223 PLT Sampling Error 223030.0.0 0 0
222 WBC CCSD Noise Error 222010.0.0 0 0
222 RBC CCSD Noise Error 222020.0.0 0 0
222 PLT CCSD Noise Error 222030.0.0 0 0
225 HGB Error 225010.XXXXX.ZZZZZ HGB Background HGB Sample
Value Value
226 WBC Analysis Error 226050.0.0 0 0
226 RBC Analysis Error 226060.XXXXX.0 Conductivity 0
32 Memory
321 RAM Error 321050.0.0 0 0
321 ROM Error 321010.0.0 0 0
321 Setup Data Error 321060.XXXXX.0 Block Area 0
323 Print Error 323010.0.0 0 0
(To be continued)

Table 6-1-3: Error Codes (Continued)
No. Error Error Message Error Code XXXXX ZZZZZ

33 Host Output 3
331 HOST Comm. Error (Offline) 331020.0.0 0 0
331 HOST Comm. Error 331030.0.0 0 0
(Time Out)
331 HOST Comm. Error 331060.0.0 0 0
(NAK Retry)
41 QC
411 L-J Control Error 411010.0.0 0 0
412 X Control Error 412010.0.0 0 0
418 Calibration Error 418010.0.0 0 0

44 External Printers 3
448 GP printout error 448010.0.0 0 0
448 GP paper empty 448020.0.0 0 0
445 DP printout error 445010.0.0 0 0
6 AAAAAA.XXXXX.ZZZZZ
A: Error Code (Phenomenon)
X: Value 1
Z: Value 2
* X and Z have different meanings depending on the error code.
6.2 SENSOR LOCATION

6.3. ERROR MESSAGE
6.3.1 Pressure
2
6.3.1.1 Pressure/Vac Error [0.5 kg/cm Pressure Error] (for KX-21) 6
6.3.1.1 Pressure/Vac Error [0.05 MPa Pressure Error] (for KX-21N) 6
2
Description : (for KX-21) 0.5 kg/cm pressure is outside the operating range.
(for KX-21N) 0.05 MPa pressure is outside the operating range.
Function : The system secures the drain operation from the waste chamber and diaphragm
pumps (DP) and the mixing operation in the transducer chambers and Hgb flow cell.
2
Check method : (for KX-21) A/D converter converts the voltage of the 0.5 kg/cm pressure sensor,
2
which is connected to the kg/cm regulator.
(for KX-21N) A/D converter converts the voltage of the 0.05 MPa pressure sensor,
which is connected to the 0.05 MPa regulator.
The instrument system checks if the pressure is within the following range.
In the Ready mode : System monitors pressure at a constant timing (every 200 ms).
2
(for KX-21) Allowable range: From 0.4 to 0.6 (kg/cm )
(for KX-21N) Allowable range: From 0.039 to 0.059 (MPa)
System assumes to be an error when pressure deviates from
the allowable range for more than 1.2 seconds continuously.
During analysis : Whole Blood (WB) Mode
At 3.0 sec. after start of sequence 1 (WBC DP dispense
- HGB background convert sample dispense)
At start of sequence 3 (RBC DP dispense - 1st dilution)
At 3.0 sec. after start of sequence 4
(Lyse Reagent DP/WBC DP dispense)
At start of sequence 5 (RBC DP dispense - 2nd dilution)
Pre-Diluted (PD) Mode
At 3.0 sec. after start of sequence 1 (WBC DP dispense
- HGB background convert sample dispense)
At start of sequence 3 (RBC DP dispense - WB mode rinse)
At start of sequence 5 (RBC DP dispense
- Lyse Reagent DP/WBC DP dispense)
2
System assumes to be an error when pressure deviates from
the allowable range at the specified timing.
KX-21's action : (1) During analysis, the alarm sounds and the error message appears in the LCD
after the sequence for aspirated sample has completed and the data is output
(all data becomes "*"). If pressure returns to the normal range after pressing
[HELP] key, the pressure is assumed as recovered and the system enters the
ready mode.
(2) In the Ready mode, the alarm sounds and the error message appears in the
LCD.
If pressure returns to the normal range after pressing [HELP] key, the pressure
error is assumed as recovered and the system enters the ready mode.

6.3.1.2 Pressure/Vac Error [250 mmHg Vacuum Error] (for KX-21) 6
6.3.1.2 Pressure/Vac Error [0.0333 MPa Vacuum Error] (for KX-21N) 6
Description : (for KX-21) 250 mmHg vacuum is outside the operating range.
(for KX-21N) 0.0333 MPa vacuum is outside the operating range.
Function : The system ensures the sample drainage from the transducer chamber and the
manometer operation.
Check method : (for KX-21) A/D converter converts voltage of the 250 mmHg vacuum sensor.
(for KX-21N) A/D converter converts voltage of the 0.0333 MPa vacuum sensor.
The system checks if the vacuum reading is within the allowable range.
In the Ready mode : System monitors at a constant timing (every 200 ms)
(for KX-21) Allowable range: from 230 to 270 (mmHg)
(for KX-21N) Allowable range: from 0.0307 to 0.0360 (MPa)
System assumes to be an error when vacuum deviates from
the allowable range for more than 1.2 seconds continuously.
During analysis : Whole Blood (WB) Mode
At start of sequence 1 (0.5 seconds before draining from
the mix chamber and W/R detection chamber)
At 0.4 seconds after start of sequence 2
(HGB background convert sample aspirate)
At start of sequence 4 (RBC charge)
(Mix chamber drain, W/R detection chamber drain)
(HGB sample convert sample aspirate)
At start of sequence 9
(0.5 seconds before draining from W/R detection chamber)
(HGB flow cell rinse solution aspirate)
At 8.6 seconds after start of sequence 9 (W/R detection chamber drain)
Pre-Diluted (PD) Mode
At start of sequence 1 (0.5 seconds before draining from
the mix chamber and W/R detection chamber)
(HGB background convert sample aspirate)
(Mix chamber drain, W/R detection chamber drain)
(HGB sample convert sample aspirate)
At start of sequence 9
(0.5 seconds before draining from W/R detection chamber)
At 11.6 seconds after start of sequence 9 (W/R detection chamber drain)
(for KX-21) Allowable range: From 100 to 270 (mmHg)
Assumed to be an error when vacuum deviates from the allowable
range at the specified timing.
KX-21's action : (1) During analysis, the error message appears in the LCD after the sequence for
aspirated sample has completed and the data is output (all data becomes "*").
If vacuum returns to the normal range after pressing [HELP] key, the vacuum
error is assumed as recovered and the system enters the ready mode.
(2) In the Ready mode, the alarm sounds and the error message appears in the LCD.
If vacuum returns to the normal range after pressing [HELP] key, the vacuum
error is assumed to have recovered and the system enters the ready mode.

A Screen Display: Pressure/Vac Error
Error Code
6 0.5 kg/cm2 Pressure
111050.XXXXX.ZZZZZ
0.0490 MPa Pressure
111049.XXXXX.ZZZZZ
250 mmHg Vacuum
112250.XXXXX.ZZZZZ
0.0333 MPa Vacuum
112333.XXXXX.ZZZZZ
XXXXX: Value when error occurred
Error Occur ex) 0.25 kg/cm2 → 250
0.0245 MPa → 245
225 mmHg → 225
0.0333 MPa → 333
ZZZZZ: Sequence No. when error occurred
ex) Sequence 3 → 3
Error Display
Not Ready
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗ ∗ He l p ∗
0 . 5 k g / c m2 P r e s s u r e E r r o r 2 5 0 mm H g V a c u u m Error
0.35 [0 . 35 - 0 .65 ] 215 [ 220 - 280 ]
2
Adjust 0.5 kg/cm Pressure. A d j u s t 2 5 0 m mH g Vacuum.
1 Returning to monitor the pressure 1 Returning to monitor the vacuum
E RR CODE : X XX X X . X . X E RR CODE : X X XX X . X . X
1:End of Adj 1:End of Adj
1 key 1 key
select select
Confirm NG
Pressure
OK
Main Screen
A by TB 99003

2
6.3.1.3 Pressure/Vac Error [0.5 kg/cm Pressure Error at count] (for KX-21) 6
6.3.1.3 Pressure/Vac Error [0.05 MPa Pressure Error at count] (for KX-21N) 6
2
Description : (KX-21) 0.5 kg/cm pressure is lowered for more than the specified time period, and
the analysis process is not assured on the following samples.
(KX-21N) 0.05 MPa pressure is lowered for more than the specified time period, and
the analysis process is not assured on the following samples.
Function : The system secures the operation of the solenoid valve, master valve, DP, etc.
2
Check method : (for KX-21) A/D converter converts voltage of the 0.5 kg/cm pressure sensor which
2
is connected to the 0.5 kg/cm regulator. 13
(for KX-21N) A/D converter converts voltage of the 0.05 MPa pressure sensor which
is connected to the 0.05 MPa regulator. 13
The system checks if the pressure reading is within the following range.
During analysis : System monitors at a constant timing (every 200 ms).

2
(for KX-21N) Allowable range: From 0.029 to 0.069 (Mpa)
System assumes to be an error when pressure deviates
from the allowable range for more than 1.2 seconds
continuously.
KX-21's action : The system immediately stops the currently running sequence and turns OFF all the
solenoid valves and pneumatic unit. Subsequent operation cannot be continued
and waited in power OFF condition.

6
Screen Display: Pressure/Vac Error
Error Code
119050.XXXXX.ZZZZZ
XXXXX: Value when error occurred

ex) 0.25 kg/cm2 → 250
0.0245 MPa → 245
ZZZZZ: Secuence No. when error occurred
ex) Secuence 3 → 3
Error Occur
∗ He l p ∗
0 . 5 k g / c m2 Pressure Error at count
Turn OFF then ON the power

3 key
select
E RR CODE : X X X X X . X . X
3:Ana. Scree
n
Main Screen
Error Display
HELP key
Not Ready

6.3.2 Chamber
6.3.2.1 Waste Not Draining
Description : The waste chamber fails to drain.
Function : The system secures drainage of waste fluid from the waste chamber and
acceptance of new waste.
Check method : System checks that the float switch in the waste chamber (sensor FSW1) is ON (the
float is in the lower limit).
In the Ready mode : System monitors every 100 nsec.
When the Main Unit is ON : System monitors at SV1 OFF (completion of drain).
KX-21's action : (1) During analysis, the analysis data and the error message appear in the LCD
after the sample analysis has completed and the data is output (all data
becomes "*").
System waits for the [HELP] key entry.
If pressure returns to the normal range after pressing [HELP] key, the pressure
is assumed to have recovered and the system enters the ready mode.
(2) In the Ready mode, the alarm sounds and the error message appears in the
LCD.
The system becomes ready when waste chamber draining sequence is
performed without an error during starting up.

Screen Display:
Waste Not Draining
Error Code
129000.0.0 13
Error Occur
Error Display
Not Ready
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗
W aste Not Drained
Check kinked or blocked tubings.
3 key
select 1 Retrying to drain the waste
1:Draining 3: Cancel
1 key
Waste Chamber
Drain until Float Switch
turns OFF
(Max. 3 sec.) NG
OK
*Help*
W aste was drained OK.
Cham ber may be dirty.

Suggest to clean the chamber
To c l ean the c ham ber,

pres s [SELECT], then
[Maintenance] -> [Clean W . Chamber]
3: Return
3 key
select
Main Screen

6.3.2.2 Replenish Diluent
Description : Diluent (CELLPACK) cannot be aspirated into the reagent chamber in specified time,
or air bubbles enters, resulting the diluent chamber float switch (sensor FSW2) OFF
and ON.
Function : The system secures reagent volume required for analysis. Or detects that the air
bubbles enters the diluent chamber.
Check method : (1) Monitoring conditions:

1) System assumes to be an error when longer than 7 seconds.
2) System assumes the entering of the air bubbles when the float switch
(Sensor FSW2) turns ON (lower) between 0.2 seconds and 0.4 seconds
after the float switch turns OFF (upper).
3) System assumes to be an error when the replenishing time is longer than
15.0 seconds.
14.5 seconds.
30.0 seconds.
(2) During sample analysis, the above 1) and 2) monitoring are performed.
(3) During the initialization, or in the reagent replenish sequence, the above 3)
monitoring is performed.
(4) During Factory Rinsing, or Shipping sequence, the above 4) and 5) monitoring
are performed.
(5) During Setting sequence, the above 1) and 5) monitoring are performed.
(6) On the other sequences, the above 1) monitoring is performed.
(7) In the Ready mode, monitoring is not performed.
KX-21's action : Turns the solenoid valve for diluent aspiration ON until the float switch turns OFF.
When the error is resolved, the system enters the ready mode.

Screen Display: No Diluent
Error Code
Error Occur 121000.0.0 13
Error Display
Not Ready
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗
Replenish Diluent Container
3 key 1 Reaspirating Diluent

select
1:Asp. Reag. 3:Cancel
1 key
Diluent
Aspiration
Diluent Asp. Sequence
ˆ
Confirm NG
—
Aspiration
OK
Auto Rinse
Main Screen

6.3.2.3 Replenish Lyse
Description : The available cycles reaches the specified count after the float switch for monitoring
the lyse reagent turns ON.
Function : The system secures lyse reagent volume remained for analysis.
Check method : System checks that the cycle is less than 95 for the 500 mL bottle after the float
switch for monitoring the lyse reagent (FSW7) turns ON (for one second
consecutively).
KX-21's action : The alarm sounds and the error message appears in the LCD. The system enters
the ready mode after [HELP] key is pressed.
3 After pressing [1] key on Help screen, lyse reagent aspiration sequence will run and
auto rinse with background check will follow. Then, system enters Ready when no
abnormality is found.

Screen Display:
Replenish Lyse
Error Code
Error Occur 124900.0.0 13
Error Display
Not Ready
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗
Replenish Lyse Container
3 key 1 Reaspirating Lyse
select
1:Asp. Reag. 3:Cancel
1 key
Lyse Aspiration
Lyse Asp. Sequence
Confirmˆ NG
—
Aspiration
OK
Auto Rinse
Main Screen

6.3.3 Printers
6.3.3.1 No Printer Paper [Built-in Printer (IP)] (KX-21)

IP paper empty [ Abnormal IP] (KX-21N) 3
Description : Paper has run out in the built-in printer.
Function : The system secures printing of measurement results.
Check method : System checks the bit of no-paper sensor in the built-in printer throughout the
printing process.
KX-21's action : (1) System displays the error message on the LCD when no paper error is detected.
(2) System waits for the [HELP] key entry after the sequence for the aspirated
sample has completed. If the error recovers after the [HELP] key is pressed,
built-in printer prints the data which has been suspended. After the data is
normally printed, system exits from the error.
NOTE: When [3] key is pressed on the HELP screen, error monitoring for the built-in
printer is canceled. The print out on the built-in printer is not possible, but the
sample analysis is possible.

Screen Display:
No Printer Paper (KX-21)
IP paper empty (KX-21N)
Error Code
345020.0.0 13
Error Occur
Error Display
Not Ready
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗
No Printer Paper
select 1 Restarting to print

3 Stop printing on built-in printer
To m ak e built-in printer on -line,

3 key
pres s [S E LECT], then
[Periph. Settings]
1:Printing 2:Paper Feed 3:Stop Output
(Paper Feed by 2 key) 1 key
NG
Confirm Paper
OK
Cancel Printer Print Sample Data that

Connection Printing is not completed
Main Screen
Main Screen
(Printer unable to use)

6.3.3.2 Printer Error [Built-in Printer (IP)] (KX-21)
Error on IP [Abnormal IP] (KX-21N) 3
Description : This message is issued when a hardware error occurs on the built-in printer, a cable
connected to the built-in printer is disconnected, or the paper holder lever releases.
Function : The system secures printing of measurement results and/or error messages.
Check method : System checks the error-bit of the built-in printer throughout the printing process.
KX-21's action : (1) System displays the error message on the LCD when a printer error is detected.
built-in printer prints the data which has been paused. After the data is
NOTE: When [3] key is pressed on the HELP screen, error monitoring for the built-in
printer is canceled. The print out on the built-in printer is not possible, but the
sample analysis is possible.

Screen Display:
Printer Error (KX-21)
Error on IP (KX-21N)
Error Code
345010.0.0 13
Error Occur
Error Display
Not Ready
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗
Error on Built-in Printer
P res s the paper gui de l ever dow n.

select
1 Restarting to print
3 Stop printing on built-in printer
3 key
To m ak e built-in printer on-line,
[Periph. Settings]
1:Printing 2:Paper Feed 3:Cancel
NG
Confirm Paper
OK

Main Screen
(Printer unable to use) Main Screen

6.3.3.3 GP printout error (Abnormal GP) (KX-21N only) 3
Description : Graphic printer is disconnected, is not powered, or the connecting cable is defective
or not properly connected.
Check method : System checks the error-bit of the graphic printer throughout the printing process.
KX-21's action : (1) System starts sounding alarm and displays the error message on the LCD when
a printer error is detected.
graphic printer prints the data which has been paused. After the data is
NOTE: When [3] key is pressed on the HELP screen, error monitoring for the graphic
printer is canceled. The GP/LP print out is not possible, but the sample
analysis is possible.

Screen Display:
Abnormal GP (KX-21N)
Error Code
448010.0.0 13
Error Occur
Error Display
Not Ready
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗
GP print out error
Check GP
select
1 Restart printing
3 Stop printing on GP
3 key
To m ak e GP on-line,
[Periph. Settings]
1 : Printing 2 : Paper Feed 3 : Stop Output
NG
Confirm Paper
OK

Main Screen

6.3.3.4 GP Paper Empty (Abnormal GP) (KX-21N only) 3
Description : Graphic printer is out of paper.
Check method : System checks the paper-empty bit of the graphic printer throughout the printing
process.
graphic printer prints the data which has been paused. After the data is
NOTE: When [3] key is pressed on the HELP screen, error monitoring for the graphic
printer is canceled. The GP/LP print out is not possible, but the sample
analysis is possible.

Screen Display:
Abnormal GP (KX-21N)
Error Code
448020.0.0 13
Error Occur
Error Display
Not Ready
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗
GP paper empty
select
1 Restart printing
3 Stop printing on GP
3 key
To m ak e GP on-line,
[Periph. Settings]
NG
Confirm Paper
OK

Main Screen

6.3.3.5 DP printout error (Abnormal DP) (KX-21N only) 3
Description : Data printer is disconnected, is not powered, or the connecting cable is defective or
not properly connected.
Check method : System checks the error-bit of the data printer throughout the printing process.
data printer prints the data which has been paused. After the data is normally
printed, system exits from the error.
NOTE: When [3] key is pressed on the HELP screen, error monitoring for the data
printer is canceled. The DP print out is not possible, but the sample analysis is
possible.

Screen Display:
Abnormal DP (KX-21N)
Error Code
445010.0.0 13
Error Occur
Error Display
Not Ready
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗
DP print out error
Check DP
select
1 Restart printing
3 Stop printing on DP
3 key
To m ak e DP on-line,
[Periph. Settings]
NG
Confirm Paper
OK

Main Screen

6.3.3.6 Print Error (KX-21 only) 3
Description : The main CPU detects an error in the data output program and data cannot be
printed on the Data Printer.
Function : System ensures that data is printed correctly on the Data Printer.
Check method : System checks whether the work memory can be reserved for printing the data.
KX-21's action : Subsequent operations are disabled. The error is reset by turning OFF the power
switch.

Screen Display: Print Error
Error Code
323010.0.0 13
Error Occur
Error Display
Analysis Disable
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗
Error on Built-in Printer
select 1 Press to return the screen.

and print again.
Stop printing on built-in printer

3 key 3
To m ake built-in printer on-line,

press [SELECT], then
[Periph. Settings]
1:Return 3:Stop Output
1 key
Cancel Printer Clear Printer Buffer

Connection
Main Screen
Analysis Able Main Screen
(Printer is usable) Analysis Able

6.3.4 Motor
6.3.4.1 Rinse Motor Error [Rinse Motor Function Error]
Description : The rinse cup operation is abnormal. The rinse cup is at the lower position when
the power turns ON.
Function : System prevents blood and rinsing solution from splashing when cleaning the whole
blood aspiration pipette. System also eliminates carryover from the previous
sample. In addition, system secures that the manual pipette does not get bent.
Check method : When the power is turned ON : System confirms that the rinse cup is not at the
lower position when the power turns ON.
When starting up : System monitors whether the rinse cup reaches
the lower limit at the timing described in the timing
chart is checked, by confirming that the
photo-interrupter at the lower limit is ON.
During the rinse cup operation test, an error is
also issued if the motor is still active 1.6 seconds
after the rinse cup starts ascending.
During analysis : System confirms that the rinse cup reaches the
lower limit at 9 seconds after starting up.
KX-21's action : System waits for the [HELP] key entry after the sequence for the aspirated sample
has completed. System enters the ready mode when pipette rinsing operation is
performed without an error during starting up. The system disables following
operation and waits for powering OFF. Some part of stored data can be performed
by pressing the [HELP] key.

Screen Display: Rinse Motor Error
Error Code
131500.0.0 13
Error Occur
∗ He l p ∗
Error on Rinse Cup
Turn OFF then ON the pow er.
If Rinse Cup is ou t of position,

Turn pow er OFF a nd c orrec t m anually.
3:Ana. Screen
3 key
select
Main Screen
Error Display
Analysis Disable

6.3.5 Temperature
6.3.5.1 Room Temp. High

6.3.5.2 Room Temp. Low
Description : Room temperature is out of the preset limit.
Function : System secures the HCT temperature compensation and PLT S/N (Signal to noise
ratio), and avoids blood clotting on the cold agglutinin disease samples. System
also secures hemolyzing in WBC samples.
Check method : System monitors A/D converted value of the thermistor installed in the WBC and
RBC transducer chambers, and checks the temperature is within the following
range.
During analysis : For 0.5 seconds before starting the counting. The mean
value of the three counted values excluding the maximum
and the minimum from the five counted values after turning
the Start switch ON should be: From 10.0°C to 40.0°C
KX-21's action : After the sequence for aspirated sample has completed, built-in printer prints the
data (the related data is printed normally). System displays the error message then
enters the ready mode.

Screen Display: Room Temp. High
Room Temp. Low
Error Code
Room Temp. High
212510.XXXXX.0 13
Room Temp. Low
212520.XXXXX.0 13
XXXXX : Temp. when error occurred

ex) 41.5 °C → 415
Error Occur
Error Display
Analysis Disable
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗
Room Tem p. Error
41.5 °C [10.0 - 40.0]
Analysis data has lower reliability.

Chec k the room te m peratuvre.
3:Return
3 key
select
Main Screen
Analysis Able

6.3.6 Analysis
6.3.6.1 Background Error
Description : Background value of any parameter exceeds the preset limit, and count results will
be falsely increased.
Function : System ensures that the background value for all parameters is lower than the
preset limit so as not to influence the analysis data.
Check method : System checks that the background value is lower than the following limits. A
background error occurs if any parameter of the background value exceeds the
preset limit either in the Auto Rinse procedure or in the background check at power
ON.
WBC : 0.3 [x103/µL]
RBC : 0.02 [x106/µL]
HGB : 0.1 [g/dL]
PLT : 10 [x103/µL]
KX-21's action : System displays the error message on LCD then enters the ready mode.

Screen Display: Background Error
Error Code
229010.0.0 13
Error Occur
Main Screen
Error Display
Analysis Disable
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗
B ac k ground c ount exc eeds to l eranc e.

WB C 4 [≤3] (x102 /uL)
RB C 1 [≤2] (x104 /uL)
HGB 0 .0 [≤0.1] (g/dL)
3 key PL T 0 .2 [≤1.0] (x104 /uL)
select
Suspected a dirty aperture or SRV.
1 E xec ute an A uto Ri ns e .
1:Auto Rinse 3:Cancel
1 key
Auto Rinse

6.3.6.2 Sampling Error [RBC Sampling Error]
Description : During RBC counting, system detects the abnormal uniformity of the counted cell
pulses that is beyond the preset limit.
Function : System monitors uniform cell pulses of RBC sample to monitor clog in the RBC
Check method : System calculates sampling values every 0.5 seconds during RBC counting. When
the maximum value, minimum value, and sum of sampling values satisfy the
following equations, system judges that a noise is generated.
(Maximum value - Minimum value - 1250)
x 100 > 2.0 [%]
Sum of sampling values
The sampling data range from 3 to 19 (1.0 s - 1.5 s) applies the above formula.
KX-21's action : (1) After the sequence for aspirated sample has completed, built-in printer prints the
data (the related data is printed as "*"). System displays the error message
then enters the ready mode. The error is cleared.
(2) The count starting level for the sampling value is 25 fL.
6.3.6.3 Sampling Error [PLT Sampling Error]
Description : During PLT counting, system detects the abnormal uniformity of the counted cell
Function : System monitors uniform cell pulses of PLT sample to monitor clog in the RBC
Check method : System calculates sampling values every 0.5 seconds during PLT counting. When
the maximum value, minimum value, and sum of sampling values satisfy the
x 100 > 2.0 [%]
The sampling data range from 3 to 17 (1.0s - 8.5s) applies the above formula.
(Sampling data 17: number of the sampling data between 8.0 s and 8.5 s.)
(2) The count starting level for the sampling value is 2 fL. (However, as for the
upper limit, it has been already set by the analog board hardware. Therefore,
the data contains much RBC data actually.)
6.3.6.4 Sampling Error [WBC Sampling Error]
Description : During WBC counting, system detects the abnormal uniformity of the counted cell
Function : System monitors uniform cell pulses of WBC sample to monitor clog in the WBC
Check method : System calculates sampling values every 0.5 seconds during WBC counting.
When the maximum value, minimum value, and sum of sampling values satisfy the
x 100 > 2.0 [%]
The sampling data range from 3 to 19 (1.0s - 9.5s) applies the above formula.

(2) The count starting level for the sampling value is 30 fL.
Screen Display: Sampling Error
Error Code
WBC Sampling Error

223010.0.0 [2] ← (Display Priority)
Error Occur RBC Sampling Error
223020.0.0 [3]
13
PLT Sampling Error
223030.0.0 [1]
Error Display
Analysis Disable
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗
Sampling Error has occurred.

Parameter: W BC RBC PLT
Suspected a clogged aperture.
1 E xe c u t e c l o g re m o va l s eq u e nc e .
If cl og persists,
press [SELECT], then 3 key
[Maintenance] -> [Cl ean Tranceducer]
or dab w ith brush after [SE LECT],
select
[ M a i n t e n a nc e [ -> [ Dra i n TD Ch a m b e r]
E RR CODE : X X X XX . X . X
1:Clog Remove 3:Cancel
1 key
Clog Removal Sequence
Canceling
Clog Removal [Burn Out]
Water Supply
Confirm Clog
NG
OK
Main Screen
Analysis Able

6.3.6.5 Sampling Error [RBC CCSD Noise Error]
6.3.6.6 Sampling Error [PLT CCSD Noise Error]
6.3.6.7 Sampling Error [WBC CCSD Noise Error]
Description : Overrun of A/D converter occurs. Overflow of counter occurs. No clearing the
counter is performed.
Function : System secures the counting procedure.
Check method : Judged by status register’s contents in gate alley after completing counting.
KX-21's action : After all the sequence for the aspirated samples are completed, built-in printer prints
the data (the related data is printed as "*"). System displays the error message
then enters the ready mode.

Screen Display: Sampling Error
Error Code
WBC
222010.0.0 [2] ←(Display Priority)
RBC
222020.0.0 [3] 13
PLT
222030.0.0 [1]
Error Occur
Error Display
Analysis Disable
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗
Sampling Error has occurred.
ER R CODE : X X X X X . X . X
3:Return
3 key
select
Main Screen
Analysis Able

6.3.6.8 HGB Error
Description : A/D converted HGB BLANK value or HGB sample value exceeds the preset limit.
Function : System ensures that the HGB value is analyzed without any problem.
Check method : HGB error occurs when the A/D converted HGB BLANK value or HGB sample value
satisfies either of the following conditions.
Blank < 50
Blank > 10000
(Sample - Blank) < -50
(Sample - Blank) > 3600
KX-21's action : After the sequence for aspirated sample has completed, built-in printer prints the
data (the related data is printed as "*"). System displays the error message then
enters the ready mode.

Screen Display: HGB Error
Error Code
225010.XXXXX.ZZZZZ
XXXXX : HGB Converted value (background)

ex) 50 → 50 13
ZZZZZ : HGB Converted value (sample)
ex) 4500 → 4500 13
Error Occur
Error Display
Analysis Disable
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗
Error occurred during HGB analys is.
Flow Cell m ay be dirty.
3 key 1 Cl ea n TD Ch am be r w i l l b e pe rf orm ed.

( It w i l l t a k e a p p ro x. 1 0 m i n u te s . )
select
E RR CODE : X XX XX . X . X
1:Cleaning 3:C ancel
1 key
Clean Transducer Sequence
∗ Clean Transducer ∗
Ready
Pour CELLCLEAN in transducer c hamber

3 key a nd p res s S TA R T s w i tc h.
select It w i l l tak e ap prox. 15 m i n .
Cycle No. after cleaning X XX XX X

Da te l as t servi ce d 97 / 12 / 1
3:Cancel
Main Screen
Analysis Able

6.3.6.9 WBC Aperture Clog
Description : The WBC transducer aperture has clogging.
Function : System secures the WBC analysis.
Check method : System monitors the A/D converted value of the clogging signal from the both
electrodes at the transducer, and checks the value is within the following range.
Also, verify the sampling data at the completion of the counting is within the
following range.
During Auto Rinsing: For 0.5 seconds before completion of the background check
on the auto rinse, system monitors clogging rate.
Clogging rate: C ≤ 120
C = 3.333 x 10 x D x 5.05/256
– 2.961 x TTD2 x 10–2
+ 3.376 x TTD
– 6.590 x 10
C: Clogging Rate (integral value, round to decimal point)
D: A/D converted value of the clogging voltage
TTD: Detector block temperature (**.*°C)
During analysis: SE : Mean value of the three sampling data before the gate
OFF
SH : Mean value of the sampling data 3 - 19 (1.0 - 9.5 s)
SE/SH ≥ 0.5
Sampling data n: number of the sampling data between
(n-1)/2 and n/2
Sampling data 3: number of the sampling data between
1.0 s and 1.5 s.
Sampling data 19: number of the sampling data between
9.0 s and 9.5 s.
KX-21's action : After all the sequences for the aspirated samples are completed, the system enters
the ready mode. All the related data are masked.
6.3.6.10 RBC Aperture Clog
Description : The RBC transducer aperture has clogging.
Function : System secures the RBC analysis.
Check method : System monitors the A/D converted value of the clogging signal from the both
electrodes at the transducer, and checks the value is within the following range.
Also, verify the sampling data at the completion of the counting is within the
following range.
During Auto Rinsing: For 0.5 seconds before completion of the background check
on the auto rinse, system monitors clogging rate.
Clogging rate: C ≤ 120
C = 3.333 x 10 x D x 5.05/256
– 2.961 x TTD2 x 10–2
+ 3.376 x TTD
– 6.590 x 10
C: Clogging Rate (integral value, round to decimal point)
D: A/D converted value of the clogging voltage
TTD: Detector block temperature (**.*°C)
During analysis: SE : Mean value of the three sampling data before the gate OFF
SH : Mean value of the sampling data 3 - 19 (1.0 s - 9.5 s)
SE/SH ≥ 0.5
the ready mode. All the related data are masked.

Screen Display: WBC Aperture Clog
RBC Aperture Clog
Error Code
WBC Clog
221040.XXXXX.0 13
RBC Clog
221090.XXXXX.0 13
When Auto Rinsing
Error Occur
XXXXX : Clot # when error occurred
ex) 105% → 1050
When Analyzing
XXXXX: 0
Error Display
Analysis Disable
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗
Clog in the aperture
Parameter: W BC RBC
1 E xe c u te c l o g re m o va l s e q u e n c e .
3 key
If cl og persists ,
pres s [SELECT], then select
[Maintenance] -> [Clean Transducer]
or dab w ith brus h after [SELECT],
[Mai ntenanc e[ -> [Drai n TD Cham ber]
ERR CODE : X X XX X . X . X
1:Clog Remove 3:Cancel
1 key
Clog Removal Sequence
Canceling
Clog Removal [Burn Out]
Water Supply
Confirm Clog
NG
OK
Main Screen
Analysis Able

6.3.6.11 Analysis Error [WBC/HGB Error (Tri-modal Particle)]
Description : Tri-modal particle size distribution cannot be correctly divided.
Function : System monitors the counterfeit lyse reagent.
Check method : System verifies that the number of cases when the tri-modal particle size cannot be
correctly counted is less than 10 consecutively. (Error occurs when 11 or more
abnormal tri-modal samples are counted consecutively.)
KX-21's action : The message [Analysis Error] is displayed and the alarm sounds. The message
remains displayed until the error is recovered or the power is turned OFF. There
are two types of the data display method.
(1) Level 1: All the tri-modal data are displayed as “---.-”.
(2) Level 2: * (low reliability mark) is attached to the obtained bi-modal data and
the tri-modal data not analyzed automatically are displayed as “---.-”.
Screen Display: Analysis Error
Error Code
226050.0.0 13
Error Occur
Error Display
Analysis Disable
HELP key
*Help*
W BC/HGB Analysis Error
E R R C O D E : X X X X X.X.X
3:Return
3 key
select
Main Screen
Analysis Able

6.3.6.12 Analysis Error [Detect Sensitivity Error (Electrical Conductivity)]
Description : Electrical conductivity gets out of the control limit.
Function : System monitors the counterfeit diluent.
Check method : System verifies that the clogging rate (C) is within the range of (80 ≤ C ≤125). A
KX-21's action : The message [Analysis Error] is displayed and the alarm sounds. The message
remains displayed until the error is recovered or the power is turned OFF. There
are two types of the data display method.
(1) Level 1: HCT and MCV data are displayed as “---.-”.
(2) Level 2: * (low reliability mark) is attached to the HCT and MCV data.
A NOTE: During Shutdown sequence, [RBC Aperture Clog] occurs at the same time.
Screen Display: Analysis Error
Error Code
226060.XXXXX.0 13
XXXXX : Conductivity
ex) 13.1 → 131
Error Occur
Error Display
Analysis Disable
HELP key
*Help*
Abnormal detection s ens itivity
E R R C O D E: X X X X X . X . X
3:Return
3 key
select
Main Screen
Analysis Able
A by TB 99003

6.3.7 Memory
6.3.7.1 Memory Error [RAM Error]
Description : The main CPU detects an error to access the RAM (Random Access Memory).
Function : System ensures that the main CPU accesses the RAM without any problem.
Check method : System writes test data to a certain address at power-on, and checks whether the
same data is read later. System repeats the same check procedure sequentially
for every RAM address.
KX-21's action : System stops the operation immediately. The error is reset by turning OFF the
power switch.
6.3.7.2 Memory Error [ROM Error]
Description : The main CPU detects an error to read data from ROM (Read Only Memory).
Function : System ensures that the main CPU reads the program from the ROM correctly.
Check method : System performs a ROM checksum (reads data from the entire area, calculates the
total, and finds the 8 low order bits). Then, system checks that the value matches
the checksum value stored in the ROM.
KX-21's action : System stops the operation immediately. The error is reset by turning OFF the
power switch.

Screen Display: Memory Error
Error Code
RAM Error
321050.0.0 13
ROM Error
321010.0.0 13
Error Occur
(when the power turned ON)
∗ He l p ∗
RAM error occurred.
∗ Alarm doesn't stop

6.3.7.3 Setup Data Error
Description : The main CPU detects an error to read data from EEPROM (Electric Erasable
Programmable Read Only Memory).
Function : System ensures that setting values are written and read correctly.
Check method : System performs a checksum in a data area and compares the calculated value
with the checksum value stored in the EEPROM.
KX-21's action : System initializes the mismatched value of the data area to the factory default
values. The data areas are separated as shown below.
- Block 1: User setting value
- Block 10: Production service setting value
Screen Display: Set Value Error
Error Code
321060.XXXXX.0 13
XXXXX : Error Block

ex) Block 10 → 10
Block 1 and 10 → 11
Block 1 : Stored Data

QC data, and
User setting values
Block 10 : Factory, Service
Setting values
Error Occur
∗ He l p ∗
RAM error occurred.
E R R CODE : X X X X X . X . X
∗ Alarm doesn't stop

Screen Display: Set Value Error
Error Code
321060.XXXXX.0 13
XXXXX : Error Block

ex) Block 1 → 1
Error Occur Block 1 : Stored Data

QC data, and
User setting values
∗ He l p ∗ ∗ He l p ∗
Memory error occurred.

• Stored data, and No If this operation is perform ed,
• QC data
• Stored data
• Q C d a t a, a n d
• Us e r s e tt i n g va l u e
1 will be repaired.
2 key
Repairing may end incomplete. will be initialized.
2 Deleting files and initializing.
E R R CODE : X X X X X . X . X
1:Repairing 2:Initialize A r e y o u O K t o i n i t i a l i z e t h e mい? いえ

Yes No
1 key Yes
Repair Initialize
Turn OFF then ON the power.

6.3.8 Host Output
6.3.8.1 HOST Comm. Error
Description : The communication with Host Computer is failed. The analysis result cannot be
transmitted to HOST. There are three types of HOST communication error (Offline,
Time Out, NAK Retry).
Function : System ensures that data is transferred to the host computer without any error.
Check method : System checks that the communication with Host Computer is succeeded.
a communication error is detected.
(2) System waits for the [HELP] key entry, then [1] (retry) or [3] (cancel) key entry.
[1] Retry: Data is transferred again. If system received an ACK, system

returns to the ready mode. If system received a NAK again, the
same error is issued.
[3] Cancel: System stops transferring data. System disables the host
connection setting and returns to the ready mode.
IMPORTANT: Data will not be transferred to the host computer until the host
setting is changed.

Screen Display: Host Comm. Error
Error Code
Off-line
331020.0.0 13
ACK Time Out Error
331030.0.0 13
NAK Retry Error
331060.0.0 13
Either of "Off-line", "ACK Time Out

Error Occur Error" or "NAK Retry Error" is displayed
between ∗ and ∗.
Main Screen
Error Display
Analysis Disable
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗
Host Output Error

select ∗ H ost ACK Tim e Out Error ∗
Check Host Condition
1 Retries to transmit to Host

3 Stop transmitting to Host
3 key To m ake Host Com puter on-line,
press [S ELECT], then
[Periph. Settings]
1:Re-sending 3:Stop Output
1 key
Cancel Host NG
Connection Host Re-sending
OK
Main Screen
Main Screen
Analysis Able
Analysis Able
(Host unable to use)

6.3.8.2 HOST Comm. Error 2 3
(Reserved. The related program has not been available yet.)

This page is intentionally left blank.

6.3.9 QC
6.3.9.1 QC Error [L-J Control Error]
Description : The main CPU detects a situation that an L-J control error occurred.
Function : System ensures that the main unit is under the quality control and the data has been
out of the control limits.
Check method : Statistically performs quality control using the weighted data of normal samples as
the control data. If the data is not within the control limit, it is assumed to be the L-J
control error.
the ready mode. The analysis data is effective.
6.3.9.2 QC Error [ X Control Error]
Description : The main CPU detects a situation that an X control error occurred.
Function : System ensures that the main unit is under the quality control and the data has been
out of the control limits.
Check method : Statistically performs quality control using the average of control blood data of
analyzed twice in a row as the control data. If the data is not within the control limit,
it is assumed to be the X control error.
the ready mode. The analysis data is effective.

Screen Display: QC Error
L-J Control Error Code
411010.0.0 13
X Control Error Code
412010.0.0 13
Error Occur
QC Screen
Error Display
Analysis Able
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗
QC data falls out of control limits.
3:Return
3 key
QC Screen
Analysis Able

6.3.9.3 Calibration Error
Description : The calibration is performed with much change in values by once.
Function : System ensures that the calibration cannot be performed more than specified.
Check method : System checks the error when the calibration change between new and old exceeds
5% or the calibration change exceeds from 80% to 120%.
KX-21's action : When the error occurs, the alarm sounds and the input setting value becomes
ineffective.

Screen Display:
Calibration Error
Error Code
418010.0.0 13
Error Occur
Calibration Screen
Error Display
Analysis Able
HELP key
∗ He l p ∗
Cal i brati on val ue i s out range .
If error persists,
• >=5% difference from the last calib.
3 key • Calib. factor is out of 80% - 120%
select
3:Return

6.3.10 Maintenance
6.3.10.1 Clean SRV
Description : The main CPU detects a situation that the cycle counter reaches the preset value.
It is the time to clean the SRV.
Function : System alerts the operator to clean the SRV.
Check method : System checks cycle count at power ON. When the SRV cycle count reaches
7500 or passes 3 months, this message is printed on the built-in printer. The cycle
count increments by 1 for every execution of analysis sequence.
KX-21's action : System only print the message and could be operate the system as usual. The
cycle count can be reset on the select menu in the maintenance mode.

Screen Display: Clean SRV
Error Code
Error Occur
(when the power turned ON) 551010.0.0 13
He l p ∗
∗Scheduled Mainte.∗
Clean the SRV.
1 Reset the cycle counter for SRV,

3 key and you can trun OFF the power.
select Continue to start up.

3
SRV cycle counter will not be reset.
Cycle No. after cleaning. XXXXXX

Date l as t s ervi c ed 97 / 12 / 1
1:Cleaning 3:Cancel
1 key
Clear SRV Cycle Counter
∗Clean SRV∗
SRV cycle counter w ill be reset.。
Turn OFF the pow er.
Start up Sequence
Ready

6.3.10.2 Clean W. Chamber (Clean Waste Chamber.)
It is the time to clean the waste chamber.
Function : System alerts the operator to clean the waste chamber.
Check method : System checks cycle count at power ON. When the waste chamber cycle count
reaches 2500 or passes a month, this message is printed on the built-in printer.
The cycle count increments by 1 for every execution of analysis sequence.

Screen Display:
Clean W. Chamber
Error Code
511030.0.0 13
Error Occur
3 key Clean the W aste Chamber.

It w i l l tak e approx. 15 m i nutes .
select

1:Cleaning 3:Cancel
1 key
Clean W. Chamber Sequence
∗Clean W. Ch amber∗
Ready
3 key Pour CELLCLEAN in transducer chamber

select It w i l l tak e approx. 15 m i nutes .

3:Cancel
Start up Sequence
Ready

6.3.10.3 Clean Transducer
It is the time to clean the transducer.
Function : System alerts the operator to clean the transducer.
Check method : System checks cycle count at power ON. When the transducer cycle count
reaches 2500 or passes a month, this message is printed on the built-in printer.
The cycle count increments by 1 for every execution of analysis sequence.

Screen Display: Clean Transducer
Error Code
511050.0.0 13
Error Occur
3 key Clean the Trans duc er.

It w i l l tak e approx. 10 m i nutes .
select

1:Cleaning 3:Cancel
1 key
Clean Transducer Sequence
∗C lean Transducer∗
Ready
Pour CELLCLEAN in transducer chamber

3 key a nd pres s START s w itc h.
select It w i l l tak e approx. 15 m i nutes .

3:Cancel
Start up Sequence
Ready

SECTION 7 SCHEMATICS
KX-21 Wiring Diagram ......................................................................................................7-1

KX-21 Tubing Diagram......................................................................................................7-2
KX-21 Hydraulic Diagram.................................................................................................7-3
KX-21 Power Supply Unit (100V) Diagram ......................................................................7-4
KX-21 Power Supply Unit (200V) Diagram ......................................................................7-5
KX-21 Timing Chart (1/7) ..................................................................................................7-6
KX-21 Timing Chart (2/7) ..................................................................................................7-7
KX-21 Timing Chart (3/7) ..................................................................................................7-8
KX-21 Timing Chart (4/7) ..................................................................................................7-9
KX-21 Timing Chart (5/7) ..................................................................................................7-10
KX-21 Timing Chart (6/7) ..................................................................................................7-11
KX-21 Timing Chart (7/7) ..................................................................................................7-12
3 KX-21N Wiring Diagram....................................................................................................7-13
KX-21 S/M -i- Revised June 2000

Detector Block
Chamber Unit
J1 J1
HGB WBC RBC
Start SW
Detector Detector Detector
Thermistor Assy No.7 J3 J4 Rinse
Unit Unit Unit
Assembly
No.1705
No.37 Mechanism
CN1
Printer Unit For Waste For Diluent
J1
Motor
M
J2
J1
J1
No.2364
No.2363
No.2365
J8
NO.2357 Lower Sensor
J5
J1
No.1674 No.1711
J2 J1 J1 ‚i‚P
J1 J2 J1 J1 Option HOST
Output
CN1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J3 J9
Detection
10Pins
CN4
CN4
Head-
J12
For
16Pins
Up
Outside 22Pins
J2
J1
Data Input HGB WBC RBC
6Pins 4Pins 4Pins Air Temp.
Detection
Detection
CN5
CN5
Paper
4Pins
For
PCB
No. 6350
Valve Unit
Thermal
32Pins
CN3
No.2356
Head
J2
For
J1
J7
Signal Waveform
J14
J1
Power 44Pins (SV1-SV21)
Supply For Motor
CN2 CN6
0.5k 250mmHg
J2 CN2
Digital Board
16Pins
Analog Board
J8
J1
No.2367 J1 (PCB No. 2135) (PCB No.6363)
DC+15V,
NO.2359 DC-15V, DC+12V
J17
J4
J3
No.2969
J13
DC100V DC+5V
J5
6Pins 5Pins
J1 J2
3Pins
AC100V Contrast Control
J4
J1
J4
J6
J1 J6 J2 3Pins
DC+24V DC+15V, AC100V
DC-15V,
14Pins
No.2366
CN1
DC100V
J5
J1
J2
CN1
CN2
LCD
J3
J2
DC+5V
No.2361
320 x 240
J2
J6
5Pins 14Pins
No.2360
CN1
CN2
J2
J4
J3
DC+12V
J1
J5
AC100V J10 J6
Relay No.2358
J3
J2
Control
J2
Power Supply Unit Connector for Production Tool Panel Keyboard
J2
No.2371
No.2362
CN1
CN2
Inverter
J1
J1
Fan Assembly
Pneumatic Unit
J1
J1
J1
J3
J6
J1
FAN
No.19
FAN
KX-21 Wiring Diagram

7-1
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
×
µ µ
φ x
φ x
φ x
φ x
φ x φ x
φ x
µ µ
FAN
( )
± ±
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) ( )
( )
( )( )
( )
FAN
( )
± ±
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) ( )
( )
( )( )
( )
• •
. .
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
❈
;; ;;;
;;;
;;)
;; ;;;
; ; ;
)
;;;; ;;; ;
;;;
❈
• •
;;;; ;
;;
• •
• • ❈
• •
• •
;;;;;;
•
; ;
;;;
;; ;;;
❈ ❈
❈ ❈ ❈
➞ ➞
~
•
•
•
•
•
KX-21 S/M KX-21 Timing Chart (3/7) Revised Sep.98
7-8
❈
+
¢¢
@@

ÀÀ
;;
QQ
@@

ÀÀ
;;
QQ
¢¢ •
•
@@

ÀÀ
;;
QQ
¢¢
•
•
•
• •
•
•
•
¢¢
@@

ÀÀ
;;
QQ
@@

ÀÀ
;;
QQ
¢¢
（
¢¢
QQ
ÀÀ

@@
;; ） ∼ ❈
) ~
•
•
•
) ~ •
) ~
･ •
• •
• •
• •
• •
•
) ~
･ • •
•
• •
•
•
•
•
) ~
) (
･
•
•
•
) ~
･
･
･

（（
∼
･
•
•
•
（
Detector Block
Chamber Unit
J1 J1
HGB WBC RBC
Start SW
Detector Detector Detector
Thermistor Assy No.7 J3 J4 Rinse
Unit Unit Unit
Assembly
No.1705
No.37 Mechanism
CN1
Printer Unit For Waste For Diluent
J1
Motor
M
J2
J1
J1
No.2364
No.2363
No.2365
J8
NO.2357 Lower Sensor
J5
J1
No.1674 No.1711
J2 J1 J1 ‚i‚P
J1 J2 J1 J1 J1
CN1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J3 J9 J12
Detection
Hand-held Type
Head-
CN4
CN4
Outside 16Pins 22Pins No.2967

For
Up
Data Input HGB WBC RBC 10Pins Barcode Reader
J2
6Pins 4Pins 4Pins Air Temp.
Detection Input
Detection
4Pins
CN5
CN5
Paper
For
PCB
HOST Output
J1
No. 6350
20Pins
No.2970
J11
J1
Thermal
CN3
Head
SERVICE
For
J2
Signal Waveform
J14
J2
J1
Power 44Pins Interface
Supply For Motor
CN2 CN6
0.5k 250mmHg Ticket Printer
J2
J2 CN2 Output
50Pins
No.2971
Analog Board Digital Board
J10
J1
No.2367 J1 (PCB No. 2150) (PCB No.6370) Graphic/Line
J3
DC+15V,
NO.2359 DC-15V, DC+12V Printer Output
J17
J4 No.2969
J3
DC+5V
J13
DC100V
J5
6Pins 5Pins
J1 J1 J2
32Pins
AC100V No.2356
J7
J1
J6
J6
J7 J6 J5 3Pins
DC+15V,
Valve Unit
DC+24V AC100V
DC-15V,
16Pins
DC100V No.2358 (SV1-SV21)
J8
J1
CN1
CN2
DC+5V
J3
J2
No.2361
14Pins
5Pins
J2
J6
J2
No.2969 14Pins 3Pins Panel Keyboard
CN1
CN2
J4
J3
DC+12V J5 J4
AC100V J1 J1
J1
J5
J10 J6
Relay No.2358
J3
J2
Control Connector for Production

Power Supply Unit Tool Contrast Control
J2
J2
No.2371
No.2366
CN1
J2
No.2362
LCD
320 x 240
CN1
CN2
CN2
Fan Assembly Inverter
J1
Pneumatic Unit FAN

J1
J1
J1
J3
J6
J1
No.19
FAN Red
1
1 Red Black
2 Black
2
KX-21N Wiring Diagram
7-13
–Table of Contents–
Appendix A KX-21 Parts List

Page
3 KX-21 Front View ...........................................................................................................A-1-02
3 KX-21 Right Side View...................................................................................................A-1-04
KX-21 Left Side View .....................................................................................................A-1-06
Valve Unit A & B.............................................................................................................A-1-08
Regulator Unit ................................................................................................................A-1-10
Printer Unit .....................................................................................................................A-1-11
Detector Block................................................................................................................A-1-12
A Pneumatic Unit KX-21 (with/PSL-21Z)...........................................................................A-1-14
A KX-21 Pneumatic Replace Kit........................................................................................A-1-15
A Pneumatic Unit KX-21 (with/PSL-21) .............................................................................A-1-16
PCB No. 4087 Assembly................................................................................................A-1-17
3 Wiring Cord No. 2967/2969/2970/2971/2996 ................................................................A-1-18
3 Drive Mechanism No. 58................................................................................................A-1-20
KX-21 Recommended Parts ..........................................................................................A-2-01
Alphabetical Order .........................................................................................................A-3-01
Code No. Order..............................................................................................................A-4-01
A Revised by ECR 399B017R-2
KX-21 S/M A-1-1 Revised May 2001

KX-21 Front View
A by TB99003

KX-21 Front View
Code No. Drawing No. Description Q’ty per Unit
973-2891-3 1 REGULATOR UNIT KX-21 UNSALABLE

923-5151-0 2 SWITCH NO.83 ASSY 1
973-2761-6 3 SRV UNIT KX-21 UNSALABLE
441-1634-7 4 PIPETTE NO.57 1
1 973-3001-8 5* PRINTER UNIT KX-21 UNSALABLE
1 983-0271-4 5 KX-21 PRINTER UNIT 1
973-2821-2 6 DETECTOR BLOCK KX-21 UNSALABLE
A 973-2991-9 7-10 OPERATION PANEL KX-21 1
263-9534-9 7 PANEL KEYBOARD KX-21 1
953-1211-8 8 VOLUME WITH WIRING NO.14 1
A 973-2991-9 9 OPERATION PANEL KX-21 1
228-3755-1 9 LCD UNIT LSUBL 6131 A 1
A 228-3755-1 10 LCD UNIT LSUBL 6131 A 1
228-9154-6 10 DC-AC INVERTER CXA-L0612-VJL 1
A 228-9154-6 11 DC-AC INVERTER CXA-L0612-VJL 1
B 322-3574-1 11# COVER UPPER/SIDE KX-21 1
3 322-3583-4 11$ COVER UPPER/SIDE KX-21N 1
B 322-3573-7 12# FRONT COVER KX-21 1
3 322-3582-1 12$ FRONT COVER KX-21N 1
*: FOR CHINESE MARKET ONLY.

#: KX-21
$: KX-21N
A by TB 99003
B by TB 99045

KX-21 Right Side View

KX-21 Right Side View
Code No. Drawing Description Q’ty per Unit

No.
973-2931-5 1 VALVE UNIT-B UNSALABLE

973-2901-3 2 VALVE UNIT-A UNSALABLE
13 261-0701-0 3% PCB NO.2135 1
13 261-0703-7 3 PCB NO.2135 1
3 13 261-0702-3 3& PCB NO.2150 1
A 261-0800-1 4% PCB NO.6363 1
3 261-0805-0 4& PCB NO.6370 1
933-4591-2 5 FAN ASSEMBLY NO.19 1
973-3311-1 6% ROM 1KX2F ASSY 1
12 011-0021-1 PM ROM 1KX2F (01-XX) ASSY PM 1
973-3011-5 7¥% FOR JAPANESE MARKET UNSALABLE
3 993-2781-1 7¥& FOR JAPANESE MARKET UNSALABLE
973-3012-9 7$% POWER SUPPLY UNIT KX-21 (C2/117V) 1
3 993-2782-5 7$& POWER SUPPLY UNIT KX-21N (C2/117V) 1
973-3013-2 7#% POWER SUPPLY UNIT KX-21 (C3/220V) 1
3 993-2783-9 7#& POWER SUPPLY UNIT KX-21N (C3/220V) 1
973-3014-6 7*% POWER SUPPLY UNIT KX-21 (C4/240V) 1
3 993-2784-2 7*& POWER SUPPLY UNIT KX-21N (C4/240V) 1
289-9642-9 8 SWITCHING REGULATOR VS50B-12 1
289-9641-5 9 SWITCHING REGULATOR VS15B-5 1
241-2108-9 10$¥ TRANSFORMER POWER PT-094 1
241-2109-2 10#* TRANSFORMER POWER PT-095 1
13 261-0758-1 11 PCB NO.4087 1
13 261-0766-1 11 PCB NO.4087 1
322-3577-1 12 PRINTER UNIT COVER KX-21 1
662-0168-8 13 PCB NO.6350 WITH ROM 1
973-4531-1 14 OUTPUT UNIT NO. 1 KX-21 1
266-5109-1 15$¥ FUSE 250V3.15A ST4-3.15A-N1 10
266-5292-6 15#* FUSE 250V2A NO.19195 (EUROPE) 10
3 993-2811-6 16& PROGRAM CARD 1KXNH ASSY 1
¥: FOR 100 VAC.

$: FOR 117 VAC.
#: FOR 220 VAC.
*: FOR 240 VAC.
%: FOR KX-21
&: FOR KX-21N
A ECR 398G031

KX-21 Left Side View
21#
Shaft Fixture No.40

(for KX-21 S/N 3904 and before)
7
21*
Shaft Fixture No.60

(for KX-21 S/N 3905 and thereafter)
17
7 OPTION
25 24*
24#
1 16 18
2
3 19
23
20
15
22 4
14 5
13
20 10 11
12
KX-21 S/M A-1-6 Revised November 2000

KX-21 Left Side View
No.
A 973-2981-1 1 PNEUMATIC UNIT KX-21 UNSALABLE

A 973-2982-5 1 PNEUMATIC UNIT KX-21 (W/PSL-21 1
973-2941-2 2 DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.51 (0.2) 1
B 973-2911-1 3 DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.49 (2.0) 1
5 923-5541-4 3 DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.34 (2.0) 1
443-3169-1 6 AIR CYLINDER T-2437 1
973-2811-5 7 SRV FIXED VALVE NO.28-R ASSY 1
973-2791-8 8 SAMPLE ROTOR VALVE NO.17 ASSY 1
973-2801-8 9 SRV FIXED VALVE NO.28-L ASSY 1
363-5382-6 10 FIXING MATERIAL NO.639 1
363-5022-6 11 FIXING MATERIAL NO. 22 1
443-2537-1 12 GLASS CHAMBER GC-37 1
973-2891-3 13 REGULATOR UNIT KX-21 UNSALABLE
3 973-2971-4 14 WASTE CHAMBER NO.39 ASSY 1
3 963-3342-1 14 WASTE CHAMBER NO.35 ASSY 1
913-0927-0 15 DILUENT CHAMBER NO.10 ASSY (C7) 1
973-2781-1 16 SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO. 6 1
973-2771-3 17 DRIVE MECHANISM NO.58 (C1/KX21) 1
442-3460-8 18 FITTING NO. 9-A 1
441-1634-7 19 PIPETTE NO.57 1
443-1290-9 20 PINCH VALVE K-1 ASSY 1
7 341-1432-5 21# SHAFT NO.249 1
7 341-1210-2 21* SHAFT NO.277 1
7 001-0331-0 22 SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO. 7 (PM) 1

7 001-0341-7 23 SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO. 7 1
7 341-1389-1 24# SHAFT NO.207 1
7 341-1209-8 24* SHAFT NO.276 1
7 461-8438-7 25 SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO. 7 REPLACE PROC. 1
#: for KX-21 S/N 3904 and before 7

*: for KX-21 S/N 3905 and thereafter 7
7 Important:
Drawing No. 22 thru 25 are the option for Sample Rotor Fixture No. 6. When replacing Sample
Rotor Fixture No. 6 (lock-on type) with Sample Rotor Fixture No. 7 (screw type), Drawing No. 22 is
needed at first. You can order Drawing No. 23, 24, 25 separately from the next time.
Be sure to confirm the KX-21 S/N indicated above (as # and *), when replacing Drawing No. 21 (for
lock-on type) to Drawing No. 24 (for screw type).
A ECR399B017R-2
B ECR 398J015

Valve Unit A & B

Valve Unit A & B

No.
973-2901-3 1 VALVE UNIT-A UNSALABLE

443-9657-6 2 AIR VALVE WTKV023-4E1-PLL-DC12 1
443-9650-1 3 AIR VALVE WTKV014 1
443-8655-5 4 AIR VALVE WTKV012 1
443-8657-2 5 AIR VALVE WTKV013 1
443-8656-9 7 AIR VALVE WTKV012-E1-PLL-DC12 1
443-8663-5 9 END PLATE WTKV010-L 1
443-8662-1 10 END PLATE WTKV010-R 1
A 973-2921-8 11 DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.50 (1.0) 1
A8 873-0647-7 11 DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.5 (1.0) 1
A 973-2911-1 12 DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.49 (2.0) 1
A5 923-5541-4 12 DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.34 (2.0) 1
973-2931-5 20 VALVE UNIT-B UNSALABLE

443-8655-5 22 AIR VALVE WTKV012 1
443-9650-1 25 AIR VALVE WTKV014 1
443-8663-5 26 ENDPLATE WTKV010-L 1
443-8662-1 27 END PLATE WTKV010-R 1
B 973-2951-0 29 DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.52 (0.05) 1
A ECR 398J015
B TB 99003

Regulator Unit

No.
367-8202-2 1 BELLOWS NO.2 WITH METAL 1

A 443-1971-6 2 RELIEF VALVE 247L-1V-1/8Z171 1
A 443-1972-0 2 RELIEF VALVE 247L4-1VZH 1
323-3713-1 3 REGULATOR UNIT CHASSIS 1
893-5012-3 4-6 TRAP CHAMBER NO. 9 ASY (C2/K45) UNSALABLE
365-1617-0 4 SUPPORT NO.104 1
443-1411-5 5 FLOAT NO. 1 1
443-0836-6 6 CHAMBER NO.17 1
933-3431-0 7-9 PU PROTECTION FILTER NO.1 ASSY UNSALABLE
365-1617-0 7 SUPPORT NO.104 1
443-1362-0 8 FILTER NO. 9 1
443-0836-6 9 CHAMBER NO.17 1
443-2455-2 10 AIR FILTER F1000-6-B 1
A ECR 398E030

Printer Unit

No.
323-3719-3 1 PRINTER UNIT CHASSIS UNSALABLE

662-0168-8 2 PCB NO.6350 WITH ROM 1
A 281-7226-1 3 PRINTER FTP-421MCL001 1
A 281-7226-1B 3 PRINTER FTP-421MCL571 1
13 266-5046-3 3-1 FUSE 120V0.5A UL-TSC-0.5A 10
A ECR 398C005

Detector Block

Detector Block

No.
973-2841-7 1 HGB UNIT KX-21 1

973-2881-6 2 THERMISTOR ASSY NO.37 1
903-2291-2 3 TRANSDUCER NO. 3 ASSY (RBC) 1
973-2831-0 4 TRANSDUCER NO.8 ASSY 1
442-8503-9 7 TUBING NO.103 1
3 973-2851-4 8 MASTER VALVE 3MV14-AF ASSY 1
3 973-2861-1 9 MASTER VALVE 3MV17-C ASSY 1
A 442-3575-9 10 NIPPLE NO. 73 10
B 973-3141-2 11 WIRING CORD NO.2365 1
B 973-3131-5 12 WIRING CORD NO.2364 1
B 973-3121-8 13 WIRING CORD NO.2363 1
B 266-7179-9 14 FERRITE CLAMP TFC-23-11-14 1
B 266-7126-1 15 FERRITE CLAMP SFC-5 1
C 973-4581-7 16 KX-21 SHIELD TUBE ASSY 1
2 442-5055-4 17 TUBE POLYURETHANE 1.8MMX3.4MM 1
3 993-0261-2 18 MASTER VALVE 3MV31 ASSY 1
A TB 99003
B TB 99045
C ECR 399K024

A Pneumatic Unit KX-21 (with PSL-21Z)

No.
281-0120-9 1 FAN FBA09A12HAZ 1

443-6954-1 2 PISTON PUMP PSL-21Z 1
443-6880-2 3 VACUUM PARTS SET FOR 21Z-PSV 1
266-8577-7 4 THERMAL PROTECTOR T70AR1U1N 1
443-6881-6 5 PRESSURE PARTS SET FOR 21Z-PSP 1
A 442-5338-7 6 TUBE POLYURETHANE 4MMIDX6MMOD 10 M
A 348-3812-1 7 SCREW BINDING M3X6 (SUS) 100
A 442-3029-0 8 ADAPTOR NO.29 1
A 346-3614-2 9 O-RING IN-20 10
A 443-0872-1 10 CHAMBER NO.48 1
A 366-0780-4 11 CHAMBER MOUNTING PLATE NO.60 1
A 348-3911-2 12 SCREW BINDING M3X4 (SUS) 100
A 442-4145-9 13 FITTING BN-6 X 4 X PT 1/8 BSN 5
A 365-6401-8 14 SLEEVE METAL MS-06 10
A 368-5760-2 15 ANTI-NOISE SPONGE NO.49-J 1
B 981-0771-7 PM KX-21 PNEUMATIC REPLACE KIT 1
A ECR 398G045 B 399B017

A KX-21 Pneumatic Replace Kit

No.
981-0771-7 1- KX-21 PNEUMATIC REPLACE KIT 1

973-2982-5 1 PNEUMATIC UNIT KX-21 (W/PSL-21 1
461-9367-3 2 KX COMPRESSOR (PSL-21) REPLACE 1
PROCEDURE
442-5418-8 3 TUBE TEFLON 0.8MMIDX1.8MMOD 5M
266-4461-8 4 TIE WRAP CV-100 1000
A ECR399B017R-2

A Pneumatic Unit KX-21 (with PSL-21)

No.
281-0120-9 1 FAN FBA09A12HAZ 1

443-6953-7 2 PISTON PUMP PSL-21 1
443-6865-6 3 VACUUM PARTS SET FOR PSL-21 1
266-8577-7 4 THERMAL PROTECTOR T70AR1U1N 1
443-6866-0 5 PRESSURE PARTS SET FOR PSL-21 1
442-5338-7 6 TUBE POLYURETHANE 4MMIDX6MMOD 10 M
442-4603-0 7 FITTING UK 6M 1
442-4575-2 8 FITTING TSM6-02 5
442-4149-3 9 FITTING BL-6 X 4 X PT 1/8 BSN 5
449-1508-2 10 SILENCER SLW-8A (SL-1/4) 1
3 443-0705-5 11 TANK NO. 29 1
A ECR 399B017R-2

PCB No. 4087 Assembly

No.
266-5377-5 1 FUSE 0.5A K19374 10

266-5433-7 2 FUSE 1.6A K19374 10
266-5434-1 3 FUSE 3.15A K19374 10
266-5375-8 4 FUSE 0.05A K19374 10
266-5435-4 5 FUSE 4A K19374 10

3 Wiring Cord No. 2967 / 2969 / 2970 / 2971 / 2996
*NOTE: Grounding wire between Front Cover and Main Unit

3 Wiring Cord No. 2967 / 2969 / 2970 / 2971 / 2996
J1 J1 J1
J3 J9 J12
No.2967 Hand-held T ype
16Pin 22Pin 10Pin
J2
Bar Code Reader
HOST O utput
J1
No.2970
20Pin
J1
J11
SERVICE
J 2
J14
J1 J1 J2 Interface
J7 J6 J5
Ticket Printer
J2
DC+24 V DC+/-15V, AC100 V
DC100 V Digital No.2971
50Pin
J1
J10
Board Graphic/Line
No.2969 (PCB No.6370)
J3
CN 2
CN 1
J2
DC+5 V Printer
J3
DC+12V
DC+5 V
J13
J5
5Pin
CN 1
CN 2
J3
DC+12V
J4
32Pin
J1
J7
J5
AC100V
16Pin
J3
J2
Relay
J8
J1
Control
14Pin
Pow er Supply Unit 5Pin
J2
J2
J6
14Pin 3Pin
J5 J4
J1 J1

No.
993-2821-3 1 WIRING CORD NO.2969 1

265-1250-5 2 WIRING CORD NO.2967 1
993-2841-8 3 WIRING CORD NO.2971 1
993-2831-1 4 WIRING CORD NO.2970 1
993-3701-7 5 WIRING CORD NO.2996 1

3 Drive Mechanism No. 58

No.
973-2771-3 1- DRIVE MECHANISM NO.58 (C1/KX-21) 1

7 341-1432-5 2# SHAFT NO.249 1
7 341-1210-2 2* SHAFT NO.277 1
365-2804-6 3 SHAFT FIXTURE NO.60 1
441-8378-0 4 RINSING CUP NO.35 1
342-1516-8 5 PULLEY NO.184 1
342-1517-1 6 PULLEY NO.185 1
342-1733-2 7 TIMING BELT 144MXL-6.4 1
443-3169-1 8 AIR CYLINDER T-2437 1
281-1160-1 9 MOTOR STP-42D213 1
228-4164-5 10 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER TLP-1204(C3) 1
#: for KX-21 S/N 3904 and before 7

*: for KX-21 S/N 3905 and thereafter 7

3 KX-21 SERIES RECOMMENDED PARTS
Code No. Description Q’ty per Unit
228-3755-1 LCD UNIT LSUBL 6131 A 1

228-9154-6 DC-AC INVERTER CXA-L0612-VJL 1
241-2108-9 TRANSFORMER POWER PT-094 1
13 261-0701-0 PCB NO.2135 1
13 261-0703-7 PCB NO.2135 1
３ 13 261-0702-3 PCB NO.2150 1
13 261-0758-1 PCB NO.4087 1
13 261-0766-1 PCB NO.4087 1
261-0800-1 PCB NO.6363 1
３ 261-0805-0 PCB NO.6370 1
263-9534-9 PANEL KEYCOARD KX-21 1
266-8577-7 THERMAL PROTECTOR T70AR1U1N 1
289-9641-5 SWITCHING REGULATOR VS15B-5 1
289-9642-9 SWITCHING REGULATOR VS50B-12 1
363-5382-6 FIXING MATERIAL NO.639 1
441-1634-7 PIPETTE NO.57 1
442-3460-8 FITTING NO. 9-A 1
442-8503-9 TUBING NO.103 1
443-1972-0 RELIEF VALVE 247L4-1VZH 1
443-2455-2 AIR FILTER F1000-6-B 1
443-2537-1 GLASS CHAMBER GC-37 1
443-6865-6 VACUUM PARTS SET FOR PSL-21 1
443-6866-0 PRESSURE PARTS SET FOR PSL-21 1
662-0168-8 PCB NO.6350 WITH ROM 1
8 873-0647-7 DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.5 (1.0) 1
933-4591-2 FAN ASSEMBLY NO.19 1
963-3661-9 DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.45 (0.5) 1
973-2771-3 DRIVE MECHANISM NO.58 (C1/KX21) 1
973-2781-1 SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO. 6 1
973-2791-8 SAMPLE ROTOR VALVE NO.17 ASSY 1
973-2811-5 SRV FIXED VALVE NO.28-R ASSY 1
973-2831-0 TRANSDUCER NO.8 ASSY 1
973-2881-6 THERMISTOR ASSY NO.37 1
KX-21 S/M A-2-1 Revised August 2000

KX-21 Parts List Alphabetical Order
Description Code No. Q’ty/Unit Page Item No.

ADAPTOR NO.29 442-3029-0 1 A-1-14 8
AIR CYLINDER T-2437 443-3169-1 1 A-1-07 6
AIR CYLINDER T-2437 443-3169-1 1 A-1-20 8
AIR FILTER F1000-6-B 443-2455-2 1 A-1-10 10
AIR FILTER F1000-6-B 443-2455-2 1 A-2-01
AIR VALVE WTKV011-E1-PLL-DC12 443-8660-4 1 A-1-09 8
AIR VALVE WTKV012 443-8655-5 1 A-1-09 4
AIR VALVE WTKV012 443-8655-5 1 A-1-09 22
AIR VALVE WTKV013 443-8657-2 1 A-1-09 5
AIR VALVE WTKV014 443-9650-1 1 A-1-09 3
AIR VALVE WTKV014 443-9650-1 1 A-1-09 25
AIR VALVE WTKV023-4E1-PLL-DC12 443-9657-6 1 A-1-09 2
ANTI-NOISE SPONGE NO.49-J 368-5760-2 1 A-1-14 15
BELLOWS NO.2 WITH METAL 367-8202-2 1 A-1-10 1
CHAMBER MOUNTING PLATE NO.60 366-0780-4 1 A-1-14 11
CHAMBER NO.17 443-0836-6 1 A-1-10 6
CHAMBER NO.17 443-0836-6 1 A-1-10 9
CHAMBER NO.48 443-0872-1 1 A-1-14 10
COVER UPPER/SIDE KX-21 322-3574-1 1 A-1-03 11#
3 COVER UPPER/SIDE KX-21N 322-3583-4 1 A-1-03 11$
DC-AC INVERTER CXA-L0612-VJL 228-9154-6 1 A-1-03 10
DC-AC INVERTER CXA-L0612-VJL 228-9154-6 1 A-1-03 11
DC-AC INVERTER CXA-L0612-VJL 228-9154-6 1 A-2-01
DETECTOR BLOCK KX-21 973-2821-2 UNSALABLE A-1-03 6
5 DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.34 (2.0) 923-5541-4 1 A-1-07 3
5 DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.34 (2.0) 923-5541-4 1 A-2-01
DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.45 (0.5) 963-3661-9 1 A-1-13 6
DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.45 (0.5) 963-3661-9 1 A-2-01


DIAPHRAGM PUMP NO.5 ASSY KX-21 873-0647-7 1 A-2-01
DILUENT CHAMBER NO.10 ASSY (C7) 913-0927-0 1 A-1-07 15
3 DRIVE MECHANISM NO.58 (C1/KX21) 973-2771-3 1 A-1-20 1-
DRIVE MECHANISM NO.58 (C1/KX21) 973-2771-3 1 A-2-01
DRIVE MECHANISM NO.58 (C1/KX21) 973-2771-3 1 A-1-07 17
END PLATE WTKV010-L 443-8663-5 1 A-1-09 9
END PLATE WTKV010-R 443-8662-1 1 A-1-09 10
END PLATE WTKV010-R 443-8662-1 1 A-1-09 27
ENDPLATE WTKV010-L 443-8663-5 1 A-1-09 26
FAN ASSEMBLY NO.19 933-4591-2 1 A-1-05 5
FAN ASSEMBLY NO.19 933-4591-2 1 A-2-01
FAN FBA09A12HAZ 281-0120-9 1 A-1-14 1
FAN FBA09A12HAZ 281-0120-9 1 A-1-16 1
FERRITE CLAMP SFC-5 266-7126-1 1 A-1-13 15
FERRITE CLAMP TFC-23-11-14 266-7179-9 1 A-1-13 14
FILTER NO. 9 443-1362-0 1 A-1-10 8
FITTING BL-6 X 4 X PT 1/8 BSN 442-4149-3 5 A-1-16 9
FITTING BN-6 X 4 X PT 1/8 BSN 442-4145-9 5 A-1-14 13
FITTING NO. 9-A 442-3460-8 1 A-1-07 18
FITTING NO. 9-A 442-3460-8 1 A-2-01
FITTING TSM6-02 442-4575-2 5 A-1-16 8
FITTING UK 6M 442-4603-0 1 A-1-16 7
FIXING MATERIAL NO. 22 363-5022-6 1 A-1-07 11
FIXING MATERIAL NO.639 363-5382-6 1 A-1-07 10
FIXING MATERIAL NO.639 363-5382-6 1 A-2-01
FLOAT NO. 1 443-1411-5 1 A-1-10 5
FRONT COVER KX-21 322-3573-7 1 A-1-03 12#
3 FRONT COVER KX-21N 322-3582-1 1 A-1-03 12$
FUSE 0.05A K19374 266-5375-8 10 A-1-17 4
FUSE 0.5A K19374 266-5377-5 10 A-1-17 1
FUSE 1.6A K19374 266-5433-7 10 A-1-17 2
13 FUSE 120V0.5A UL-TSC-0.5A 266-5046-3 10 A-1-11 3-1
FUSE 250V2A NO.19195 (EUROPE) 266-5292-6 10 A-1-05 15#*
FUSE 250V3.15A ST4-3.15A-N1 266-5109-1 10 A-1-05 15$¥
FUSE 3.15A K19374 266-5434-1 10 A-1-17 3
FUSE 4A K19374 266-5435-4 10 A-1-17 5


GLASS CHAMBER GC-37 443-2537-1 1 A-1-07 12
GLASS CHAMBER GC-37 443-2537-1 1 A-2-01
HGB UNIT KX-21 973-2841-7 1 A-1-13 1
KX COMPRESSOR (PSL-21) REPLACE 461-9367-3 1 A-1-15 2
PROCEDURE
KX-21 PNEUMATIC REPLACE KIT 981-0771-7 1 A-1-14 PM
KX-21 PNEUMATIC REPLACE KIT 981-0771-7 1 A-1-15 1-
1 KX-21 PRINTER UNIT 983-0271-4 1 A-1-03 5
KX-21 SHIELD TUBE ASSY 973-4581-7 1 A-1-13 16
LCD UNIT LSUBL 6131 A 228-3755-1 1 A-1-03 9
LCD UNIT LSUBL 6131 A 228-3755-1 1 A-1-03 10
LCD UNIT LSUBL 6131 A 228-3755-1 1 A-2-01
3 MASTER VALVE 3MV14-AF ASSY 973-2851-4 1 A-1-13 8
3 MASTER VALVE 3MV17-C ASSY 973-2861-1 1 A-1-13 9
3 MASTER VALVE 3MV31 ASSY 993-0261-2 1 A-1-13 18
MOTOR STR-42D213 281-1160-1 1 A-1-20 9
NIPPLE NO. 73 442-3575-9 10 A-1-13 10
O-RING IN-20 346-3614-2 10 A-1-14 9
OPERATION PANEL KX-21 973-2991-9 1 A-1-03 7-10
12 OPERATION PANEL KX-21 973-2991-9 1 A-1-03 9
OUTPUT UNIT NO. 1 KX-21 973-4531-1 1 A-1-05 14
PANEL KEYBOARD KX-21 263-9534-9 1 A-1-03 7
PANEL KEYCOARD KX-21 263-9534-9 1 A-2-01
13 PCB NO.2135 261-0701-0 1 A-1-05 3%
13 PCB NO.2135 261-0701-0 1 A-2-01
13 PCB NO.2135 261-0703-7 1 A-1-05 3
13 PCB NO.2135 261-0703-7 1 A-2-01
3 13 PCB NO.2150 261-0702-3 1 A-1-05 3&
3 13 PCB NO.2150 261-0702-3 1 A-2-01
13 PCB NO.4087 261-0758-1 1 A-1-05 11
13 PCB NO.4087 261-0758-1 1 A-2-01
13 PCB NO.4087 261-0766-1 1 A-1-05 11
13 PCB NO.4087 261-0766-1 1 A-2-01
PCB NO.6350 WITH ROM 662-0168-8 1 A-1-05 13
PCB NO.6350 WITH ROM 662-0168-8 1 A-1-11 2
PCB NO.6350 WITH ROM 662-0168-8 1 A-2-01
PCB NO.6363 261-0800-1 1 A-1-05 4%
PCB NO.6363 261-0800-1 1 A-2-01
3 PCB NO.6370 261-0805-0 1 A-1-05 4&
3 PCB NO.6370 261-0805-0 1 A-2-01
PHOTO-INTERRUPTER TLP-1204(C3) 228-4164-5 1 A-1-20 10
PINCH VALVE K-1 ASSY 443-1290-9 1 A-1-07 20
PIPETTE NO.57 441-1634-7 1 A-1-03 4
PIPETTE NO.57 441-1634-7 1 A-1-07 19


PIPETTE NO.57 441-1634-7 1 A-2-01
PISTON PUMP PSL-21 443-6953-7 1 A-1-16 2
PISTON PUMP PSL-21Z 443-6954-1 1 A-1-14 2
12 PNEUMATIC UNIT KX-21 973-2981-1 UNSALABLE A-1-07 1
PNEUMATIC UNIT KX-21 (W/PSL-21 973-2982-5 1 A-1-07 1
PNEUMATIC UNIT KX-21 (W/PSL-21 973-2982-5 1 A-1-15 1
POWER SUPPLY UNIT KX-21 (C2/117V) 973-3012-9 UNSALABLE A-1-05 7$%
POWER SUPPLY UNIT KX-21 (C3/220V) 973-3013-2 UNSALABLE A-1-05 7#%
POWER SUPPLY UNIT KX-21 (C4/240V) 973-3014-6 UNSALABLE A-1-05 7*%
3 POWER SUPPLY UNIT KX-21N (C2/117V) 993-2782-5 UNSALABLE A-1-05 7$&
3 POWER SUPPLY UNIT KX-21N (C3/220V) 993-2783-9 UNSALABLE A-1-05 7#&
3 POWER SUPPLY UNIT KX-21N (C4/240V) 993-2784-2 UNSALABLE A-1-05 7*&
PRESSURE PARTS SET FOR 21Z-PSP 443-6881-6 1 A-1-14 5
PRESSURE PARTS SET FOR PSL-21 443-6866-0 1 A-1-16 5
PRESSURE PARTS SET FOR PSL-21 443-6866-0 1 A-2-01
PRINTER FTP-421MCL001 281-7226-1 1 A-1-11 3
12 PRINTER FTP-421MCL571 281-7226-1B 1 A-1-11 3
PRINTER UNIT CHASSIS 323-3719-3 UNSALABLE A-1-11 1
PRINTER UNIT COVER KX-21 322-3577-1 1 A-1-05 12
1 PRINTER UNIT KX-21 973-3001-8 UNSALABLE A-1-03 5*
3 PROGRAM CARD 1KXNH ASSY 993-2811-6 1 A-1-05 16&
PU PROTECTION FILTER NO.1 ASSY 933-3431-0 UNSALABLE A-1-10 7-9
PULLEY NO.184 342-1516-8 1 A-1-20 5
PULLEY NO.185 342-1517-1 1 A-1-20 6
REGULATOR UNIT CHASSIS 323-3713-1 1 A-1-10 3
REGULATOR UNIT KX-21 973-2891-3 UNSALABLE A-1-03 1
REGULATOR UNIT KX-21 973-2891-3 UNSALABLE A-1-07 13
12 RELIEF VALVE 247L-1V-1/8Z171 443-1971-6 1 A-1-10 2
RELIEF VALVE 247L4-1VZH 443-1972-0 1 A-1-10 2
RELIEF VALVE 247L4-1VZH 443-1972-0 1 A-2-01
RINSING CUP NO.35 441-8378-0 1 A-1-20 4
ROM 1KX2F ASSY 973-3311-1 1 A-1-05 6%
12 ROM 1KX2F (01-XX) ASSY PM 011-0021-1 1 A-1-05 PM
SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO. 6 973-2781-1 1 A-1-07 16
SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO. 6 973-2781-1 1 A-2-01
7 SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO. 7 001-0341-7 1 A-1-07 22PM
7 SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO. 7 (PM) 001-0331-0 1 A-1-07 PM
7 SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO. 7 461-8438-7 1 A-1-07 24PM
REPLACE PROC.
SAMPLE ROTOR VALVE NO.17 ASSY 973-2791-8 1 A-1-07 8
SAMPLE ROTOR VALVE NO.17 ASSY 973-2791-8 1 A-2-01
SCREW BINDING M3X4 (SUS) 348-3911-2 100 A-1-14 12
SCREW BINDING M3X6 (SUS) 348-3812-1 100 A-1-14 7
SHAFT FIXTURE NO.60 365-2804-6 1 A-1-20 3


7 SHAFT NO.207 341-1389-1 1 A-1-07 23#PM
7 SHAFT NO.249 341-1432-5 1 A-1-07 21#
7 SHAFT NO.249 341-1432-5 1 A-1-20 2#
7 SHAFT NO.276 341-1209-8 1 A-1-07 23*PM
7 SHAFT NO.277 341-1210-2 1 A-1-07 21*
7 SHAFT NO.277 341-1210-2 1 A-1-20 2*
SILENCER SLW-8A (SL-1/4) 449-1508-2 1 A-1-16 10
SLEEVE METAL MS-06 365-6401-8 10 A-1-14 14
SRV FIXED VALVE NO.28-L ASSY 973-2801-8 1 A-1-07 9
SRV FIXED VALVE NO.28-L ASSY 973-2801-8 1 A-2-01
SRV FIXED VALVE NO.28-R ASSY 973-2811-5 1 A-1-07 7
SRV FIXED VALVE NO.28-R ASSY 973-2811-5 1 A-2-01
SRV UNIT KX-21 973-2761-6 UNSALABLE A-1-03 3
SUPPORT NO.104 365-1617-0 1 A-1-10 4
SUPPORT NO.104 365-1617-0 1 A-1-10 7
SWITCH NO.83 ASSY 923-5151-0 1 A-1-03 2
SWITCHING REGULATOR VS15B-5 289-9641-5 1 A-1-05 9
SWITCHING REGULATOR VS15B-5 289-9641-5 1 A-2-01
SWITCHING REGULATOR VS50B-12 289-9642-9 1 A-1-05 8
SWITCHING REGULATOR VS50B-12 289-9642-9 1 A-2-01
3 12 TANK NO. 29 443-0705-5 1 A-1-16 11
THERMAL PROTECTOR T70AR1U1N 266-8577-7 1 A-1-14 4
THERMAL PROTECTOR T70AR1U1N 266-8577-7 1 A-1-16 4
THERMAL PROTECTOR T70AR1U1N 266-8577-7 1 A-2-01
THERMISTOR ASSY NO.37 973-2881-6 1 A-1-13 2
THERMISTOR ASSY NO.37 973-2881-6 1 A-2-01
TIE WRAP CV-100 266-4461-8 1000 A-1-15 4
TIMING BELT 144MXL-6.4 342-1733-2 1 A-1-20 7
TRANSDUCER NO. 3 ASSY (RBC) 903-2291-2 1 A-1-13 3
TRANSDUCER NO.8 ASSY 973-2831-0 1 A-1-13 4
TRANSDUCER NO.8 ASSY 973-2831-0 1 A-2-01
TRANSFORMER POWER PT-094 241-2108-9 1 A-1-05 10$¥
TRANSFORMER POWER PT-094 241-2108-9 1 A-2-01
TRANSFORMER POWER PT-095 241-2109-2 1 A-1-05 10#*
TRAP CHAMBER NO. 9 ASY (C2/K45) 893-5012-3 UNSALABLE A-1-10 4-6
2 TUBE POLYURETHANE 1.8MMX3.4MM 442-5055-4 1 A-1-13 17
TUBE POLYURETHANE 4MMIDX6MMOD 442-5338-7 10 M A-1-14 6
TUBE POLYURETHANE 4MMIDX6MMOD 442-5338-7 10 M A-1-16 6
TUBE TEFLON 0.8MMIDX1.8MMOD 442-5418-8 5M A-1-15 3
TUBING NO.103 442-8503-9 1 A-1-13 7
TUBING NO.103 442-8503-9 1 A-2-01
VACUUM PARTS SET FOR 21Z-PSV 443-6880-2 1 A-1-14 3
VACUUM PARTS SET FOR PSL-21 443-6865-6 1 A-1-16 3
VACUUM PARTS SET FOR PSL-21 443-6865-6 1 A-2-01


VALVE UNIT-A 973-2901-3 UNSALABLE A-1-05 2
VALVE UNIT-A 973-2901-3 UNSALABLE A-1-09 1
VALVE UNIT-B 973-2931-5 UNSALABLE A-1-05 1
VALVE UNIT-B 973-2931-5 UNSALABLE A-1-09 20
VOLUME WITH WIRING NO.14 953-1211-8 1 A-1-03 8
3 WASTE CHAMBER NO.35 ASSY 963-3342-1 1 A-1-07 14
3 WASTE CHAMBER NO.39 ASSY 973-2971-4 1 A-1-07 14
WIRING CORD NO.2363 973-3121-8 1 A-1-13 13
WIRING CORD NO.2364 973-3131-5 1 A-1-13 12
WIRING CORD NO.2365 973-3141-2 1 A-1-13 11
3 WIRING CORD NO.2967 265-1250-5 1 A-1-19 2
3 WIRING CORD NO.2969 993-2821-3 1 A-1-19 1
3 WIRING CORD NO.2970 993-2831-1 1 A-1-19 4
3 WIRING CORD NO.2971 993-2841-8 1 A-1-19 3
3 WIRING CORD NO.2996 993-3701-7 1 A-1-19 5

KX-21 Parts List Part Code Number Order
Code No. Description Q’ty/Unit Page Item No.

7 001-0331-0 SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO. 7 (PM) 1 A-1-07 PM
7 001-0341-7 SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO. 7 1 A-1-07 22PM
12 011-0021-1 ROM 1KX2F (01-XX) ASSY PM 1 A-1-05 PM
228-3755-1 LCD UNIT LSUBL 6131 A 1 A-1-03 9
228-3755-1 LCD UNIT LSUBL 6131 A 1 A-1-03 10
228-3755-1 LCD UNIT LSUBL 6131 A 1 A-2-01
228-4164-5 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER TLP-1204(C3) 1 A-1-20 10
228-9154-6 DC-AC INVERTER CXA-L0612-VJL 1 A-1-03 10
228-9154-6 DC-AC INVERTER CXA-L0612-VJL 1 A-1-03 11
228-9154-6 DC-AC INVERTER CXA-L0612-VJL 1 A-2-01
241-2108-9 TRANSFORMER POWER PT-094 1 A-1-05 10$¥
241-2108-9 TRANSFORMER POWER PT-094 1 A-2-01
241-2109-2 TRANSFORMER POWER PT-095 1 A-1-05 10#*
13 261-0701-0 PCB NO.2135 1 A-1-05 3%
13 261-0701-0 PCB NO.2135 1 A-2-01
3 13 261-0702-3 PCB NO.2150 1 A-1-05 3&
3 13 261-0702-3 PCB NO.2150 1 A-2-01
13 261-0703-7 PCB NO.2135 1 A-1-05 3
13 261-0703-7 PCB NO.2135 1 A-2-01
13 261-0758-1 PCB NO.4087 1 A-1-05 11
13 261-0758-1 PCB NO.4087 1 A-2-01
13 261-0766-1 PCB NO.4087 1 A-1-05 11
13 261-0766-1 PCB NO.4087 1 A-2-01
261-0800-1 PCB NO.6363 1 A-1-05 4%
261-0800-1 PCB NO.6363 1 A-2-01
3 261-0805-0 PCB NO.6370 1 A-1-05 4&
3 261-0805-0 PCB NO.6370 1 A-2-01
263-9534-9 PANEL KEYBOARD KX-21 1 A-1-03 7
263-9534-9 PANEL KEYCOARD KX-21 1 A-2-01
3 265-1250-5 WIRING CORD NO.2967 1 A-1-19 2
266-4461-8 TIE WRAP CV-100 1000 A-1-15 4
13 266-5046-3 FUSE 120V0.5A UL-TSC-0.5A 10 A-1-11 3-1
266-5109-1 FUSE 250V3.15A ST4-3.15A-N1 10 A-1-05 15$¥
266-5292-6 FUSE 250V2A NO.19195 (EUROPE) 10 A-1-05 15#*
266-5375-8 FUSE 0.05A K19374 10 A-1-17 4
266-5377-5 FUSE 0.5A K19374 10 A-1-17 1
266-5433-7 FUSE 1.6A K19374 10 A-1-17 2
266-5434-1 FUSE 3.15A K19374 10 A-1-17 3
266-5435-4 FUSE 4A K19374 10 A-1-17 5
266-7126-1 FERRITE CLAMP SFC-5 1 A-1-13 15
266-7179-9 FERRITE CLAMP TFC-23-11-14 1 A-1-13 14
266-8577-7 THERMAL PROTECTOR T70AR1U1N 1 A-1-14 4
266-8577-7 THERMAL PROTECTOR T70AR1U1N 1 A-1-16 4
266-8577-7 THERMAL PROTECTOR T70AR1U1N 1 A-2-01


281-0120-9 FAN FBA09A12HAZ 1 A-1-14 1
281-0120-9 FAN FBA09A12HAZ 1 A-1-16 1
281-1160-1 MOTOR STP-42D213 1 A-1-20 9
12 281-7226-1 PRINTER FTP-421MCL001 1 A-1-11 3
281-7226-1B PRINTER FTP-421MCL571 1 A-1-11 3
289-9641-5 SWITCHING REGULATOR VS15B-5 1 A-1-05 9
289-9641-5 SWITCHING REGULATOR VS15B-5 1 A-2-01
289-9642-9 SWITCHING REGULATOR VS50B-12 1 A-1-05 8
289-9642-9 SWITCHING REGULATOR VS50B-12 1 A-2-01
322-3573-7 FRONT COVER KX-21 1 A-1-03 12#
322-3574-1 COVER UPPER/SIDE KX-21 1 A-1-03 11#
322-3577-1 PRINTER UNIT COVER KX-21 1 A-1-05 12
3 322-3582-1 FRONT COVER KX-21N 1 A-1-03 12$
3 322-3583-4 COVER UPPER/SIDE KX-21N 1 A-1-03 11$
323-3713-1 REGULATOR UNIT CHASSIS 1 A-1-10 3
323-3719-3 PRINTER UNIT CHASSIS UNSALABLE A-1-11 1
7 341-1209-8 SHAFT NO.276 1 A-1-07 23*PM
7 341-1210-2 SHAFT NO.277 1 A-1-07 21*
7 341-1210-2 SHAFT NO.277 1 A-1-20 2*
7 341-1432-5 SHAFT NO.249 1 A-1-07 21#
7 341-1389-1 SHAFT NO.207 1 A-1-07 23#PM
7 341-1432-5 SHAFT NO.249 1 A-1-20 2#
342-1516-8 PULLEY NO.184 1 A-1-20 5
342-1517-1 PULLEY NO.185 1 A-1-20 6
342-1733-2 TIMING BELT 144MXL-6.4 1 A-1-20 7
346-3614-2 O-RING IN-20 10 A-1-14 9
348-3812-1 SCREW BINDING M3X6 (SUS) 100 A-1-14 7
348-3911-2 SCREW BINDING M3X4 (SUS) 100 A-1-14 12
363-5022-6 FIXING MATERIAL NO. 22 1 A-1-07 11
363-5382-6 FIXING MATERIAL NO.639 1 A-1-07 10
363-5382-6 FIXING MATERIAL NO.639 1 A-2-01
365-1617-0 SUPPORT NO.104 1 A-1-10 4
365-1617-0 SUPPORT NO.104 1 A-1-10 7
365-2804-6 SHAFT FIXTURE NO.60 1 A-1-20 3
365-6401-8 SLEEVE METAL MS-06 10 A-1-14 14
366-0780-4 CHAMBER MOUNTING PLATE NO.60 1 A-1-14 11
367-8202-2 BELLOWS NO.2 WITH METAL 1 A-1-10 1
368-5760-2 ANTI-NOISE SPONGE NO.49-J 1 A-1-14 15
441-1634-7 PIPETTE NO.57 1 A-1-03 4
441-1634-7 PIPETTE NO.57 1 A-1-07 19
441-1634-7 PIPETTE NO.57 1 A-2-01
441-8378-0 RINSING CUP NO.35 1 A-1-20 4
442-3029-0 ADAPTOR NO.29 1 A-1-14 8
442-3460-8 FITTING NO. 9-A 1 A-1-07 18


442-3460-8 FITTING NO. 9-A 1 A-2-01
442-3575-9 NIPPLE NO. 73 10 A-1-13 10
442-4145-9 FITTING BN-6 X 4 X PT 1/8 BSN 5 A-1-14 13
442-4149-3 FITTING BL-6 X 4 X PT 1/8 BSN 5 A-1-16 9
442-4575-2 FITTING TSM6-02 5 A-1-16 8
442-4603-0 FITTING UK 6M 1 A-1-16 7
2 442-5055-4 TUBE POLYURETHANE 1.8MMX3.4MM 1 A-1-13 17
442-5338-7 TUBE POLYURETHANE 4MMIDX6MMOD 10 M A-1-14 6
442-5338-7 TUBE POLYURETHANE 4MMIDX6MMOD 10 M A-1-16 6
442-5418-8 TUBE TEFLON 0.8MMIDX1.8MMOD 5M A-1-15 3
442-8503-9 TUBING NO.103 1 A-1-13 7
442-8503-9 TUBING NO.103 1 A-2-01
12 443-0705-5 TANK NO. 29 1 A-1-16 11
443-0836-6 CHAMBER NO.17 1 A-1-10 6
443-0836-6 CHAMBER NO.17 1 A-1-10 9
443-0872-1 CHAMBER NO.48 1 A-1-14 10
443-1290-9 PINCH VALVE K-1 ASSY 1 A-1-07 20
443-1362-0 FILTER NO. 9 1 A-1-10 8
443-1411-5 FLOAT NO. 1 1 A-1-10 5
12 443-1971-6 RELIEF VALVE 247L-1V-1/8Z171 1 A-1-10 2
443-1972-0 RELIEF VALVE 247L4-1VZH 1 A-1-10 2
443-1972-0 RELIEF VALVE 247L4-1VZH 1 A-2-01
443-2455-2 AIR FILTER F1000-6-B 1 A-1-10 10
443-2455-2 AIR FILTER F1000-6-B 1 A-2-01
443-2537-1 GLASS CHAMBER GC-37 1 A-1-07 12
443-2537-1 GLASS CHAMBER GC-37 1 A-2-01
443-3169-1 AIR CYLINDER T-2437 1 A-1-07 6
443-3169-1 AIR CYLINDER T-2437 1 A-1-20 8
443-6865-6 VACUUM PARTS SET FOR PSL-21 1 A-1-16 3
443-6865-6 VACUUM PARTS SET FOR PSL-21 1 A-2-01
443-6866-0 PRESSURE PARTS SET FOR PSL-21 1 A-1-16 5
443-6866-0 PRESSURE PARTS SET FOR PSL-21 1 A-2-01
443-6880-2 VACUUM PARTS SET FOR 21Z-PSV 1 A-1-14 3
443-6881-6 PRESSURE PARTS SET FOR 21Z-PSP 1 A-1-14 5
443-6953-7 PISTON PUMP PSL-21 1 A-1-16 2
443-6954-1 PISTON PUMP PSL-21Z 1 A-1-14 2
443-8655-5 AIR VALVE WTKV012 1 A-1-09 4
443-8655-5 AIR VALVE WTKV012 1 A-1-09 22
443-8656-9 AIR VALVE WTKV012-E1-PLL-DC12 1 A-1-09 7
443-8657-2 AIR VALVE WTKV013 1 A-1-09 5
443-8662-1 END PLATE WTKV010-R 1 A-1-09 10
443-8662-1 END PLATE WTKV010-R 1 A-1-09 27
443-8663-5 END PLATE WTKV010-L 1 A-1-09 9


443-8663-5 ENDPLATE WTKV010-L 1 A-1-09 26
443-9650-1 AIR VALVE WTKV014 1 A-1-09 3
443-9650-1 AIR VALVE WTKV014 1 A-1-09 25
443-9657-6 AIR VALVE WTKV023-4E1-PLL-DC12 1 A-1-09 2
449-1508-2 SILENCER SLW-8A (SL-1/4) 1 A-1-16 10
461-8438-7 KX COMPRESSOR (PSL-21) REPLACE 1 A-1-15 2
PROCEDURE
7 461-9367-3 SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO. 7 1 A-1-07 24PM
REPLACE PROC.
662-0168-8 PCB NO.6350 WITH ROM 1 A-1-05 13
662-0168-8 PCB NO.6350 WITH ROM 1 A-1-11 2
662-0168-8 PCB NO.6350 WITH ROM 1 A-2-01
8 873-0647-7 DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.5 (1.0) 1 A-1-07 4
8 873-0647-7 DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.5 (1.0) 1 A-2-01
893-5012-3 TRAP CHAMBER NO. 9 ASY (C2/K45) UNSALABLE A-1-10 4-6
903-2291-2 TRANSDUCER NO. 3 ASSY (RBC) 1 A-1-13 3
913-0927-0 DILUENT CHAMBER NO.10 ASSY (C7) 1 A-1-07 15
923-5151-0 SWITCH NO.83 ASSY 1 A-1-03 2
933-3431-0 PU PROTECTION FILTER NO.1 ASSY UNSALABLE A-1-10 7-9
933-4591-2 FAN ASSEMBLY NO.19 1 A-1-05 5
933-4591-2 FAN ASSEMBLY NO.19 1 A-2-01
953-1211-8 VOLUME WITH WIRING NO.14 1 A-1-03 8
3 963-3342-1 WASTE CHAMBER NO.35 ASSY 1 A-1-07 14
963-3661-9 DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.45 (0.5) 1 A-1-13 6
963-3661-9 DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.45 (0.5) 1 A-2-01
973-2761-6 SRV UNIT KX-21 UNSALABLE A-1-03 3
973-2771-3 DRIVE MECHANISM NO.58 (C1/KX21) 1 A-1-07 17
973-2771-3 DRIVE MECHANISM NO.58 (C1/KX21) 1 A-1-20 1-
973-2771-3 DRIVE MECHANISM NO.58 (C1/KX21) 1 A-2-01
973-2781-1 SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO. 6 1 A-1-07 16
973-2781-1 SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO. 6 1 A-2-01
973-2791-8 SAMPLE ROTOR VALVE NO.17 ASSY 1 A-1-07 8
973-2791-8 SAMPLE ROTOR VALVE NO.17 ASSY 1 A-2-01
973-2801-8 SRV FIXED VALVE NO.28-L ASSY 1 A-1-07 9
973-2801-8 SRV FIXED VALVE NO.28-L ASSY 1 A-2-01
973-2811-5 SRV FIXED VALVE NO.28-R ASSY 1 A-1-07 7
973-2811-5 SRV FIXED VALVE NO.28-R ASSY 1 A-2-01


973-2821-2 DETECTOR BLOCK KX-21 UNSALABLE A-1-03 6
973-2831-0 TRANSDUCER NO.8 ASSY 1 A-1-13 4
973-2831-0 TRANSDUCER NO.8 ASSY 1 A-2-01
973-2841-7 HGB UNIT KX-21 1 A-1-13 1
3 973-2851-4 MASTER VALVE 3MV14-AF ASSY 1 A-1-13 8
3 973-2861-1 MASTER VALVE 3MV17-C ASSY 1 A-1-13 9
973-2881-6 THERMISTOR ASSY NO.37 1 A-1-13 2
973-2881-6 THERMISTOR ASSY NO.37 1 A-2-01
973-2891-3 REGULATOR UNIT KX-21 UNSALABLE A-1-03 1
973-2891-3 REGULATOR UNIT KX-21 UNSALABLE A-1-07 13
973-2901-3 VALVE UNIT-A UNSALABLE A-1-05 2
973-2901-3 VALVE UNIT-A UNSALABLE A-1-09 1
973-2931-5 VALVE UNIT-B UNSALABLE A-1-05 1
973-2931-5 VALVE UNIT-B UNSALABLE A-1-09 20
3 973-2971-4 WASTE CHAMBER NO.39 ASSY 1 A-1-07 14
12 973-2981-1 PNEUMATIC UNIT KX-21 UNSALABLE A-1-07 1
973-2982-5 PNEUMATIC UNIT KX-21 (W/PSL-21 1 A-1-07 1
973-2982-5 PNEUMATIC UNIT KX-21 (W/PSL-21 1 A-1-15 1
973-2991-9 OPERATION PANEL KX-21 1 A-1-03 7-10
973-2991-9 OPERATION PANEL KX-21 1 A-1-03 9
1 973-3001-8 PRINTER UNIT KX-21 UNSALABLE A-1-03 5*
973-3011-5 FOR JAPANESE MARKET UNSALABLE A-1-05 7¥%
973-3012-9 POWER SUPPLY UNIT KX-21 (C2/117V) UNSALABLE A-1-05 7$%
973-3013-2 POWER SUPPLY UNIT KX-21 (C3/220V) UNSALABLE A-1-05 7#%
973-3014-6 POWER SUPPLY UNIT KX-21 (C4/240V) UNSALABLE A-1-05 7*%
973-3121-8 WIRING CORD NO.2363 1 A-1-13 13
973-3131-5 WIRING CORD NO.2364 1 A-1-13 12
973-3141-2 WIRING CORD NO.2365 1 A-1-13 11
973-3311-1 ROM 1KX2F ASSY 1 A-1-05 6%


973-4531-1 OUTPUT UNIT NO. 1 KX-21 1 A-1-05 14
973-4581-7 KX-21 SHIELD TUBE ASSY 1 A-1-13 16
981-0771-7 KX-21 PNEUMATIC REPLACE KIT 1 A-1-14 PM
981-0771-7 KX-21 PNEUMATIC REPLACE KIT 1 A-1-15 1-
1 983-0271-4 KX-21 PRINTER UNIT 1 A-1-03 5
3 993-0261-2 MASTER VALVE 3MV31 ASSY 1 A-1-13 18
3 993-2781-1 FOR JAPANESE MARKET UNSALABLE A-1-05 7¥&
3 993-2782-5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT KX-21N (C2/117V) UNSALABLE A-1-05 7$&
3 993-2783-9 POWER SUPPLY UNIT KX-21N UNSALABLE A-1-05 7#&
(C3/220V)
3 993-2784-2 POWER SUPPLY UNIT KX-21N UNSALABLE A-1-05 7*&
(C4/240V)
3 993-2811-6 PROGRAM CARD 1KXNH ASSY 1 A-1-05 16&
3 993-2821-3 WIRING CORD NO.2969 1 A-1-19 1
3 993-2831-1 WIRING CORD NO.2970 1 A-1-19 4
3 993-2841-8 WIRING CORD NO.2971 1 A-1-19 3
3 993-3701-7 WIRING CORD NO.2996 1 A-1-19 5

Electronic Documentation Part Manual Addendum
SAP Ordering Information

Part Number: 228-3755-1
Description: LCD UNIT LSUBL 6131 A
Part Manual
Description: LCD UNIT LSUBL 6131 A
Page Numbers: 1-03 2-01
Part Details
Common Names:
Service Information:
Published on: 4/16/2001


Description: PHOTO-INTERRUPTER TLP-1204(C3)
Part Manual
Description: PHOTO-INTERRUPTER TLP-1204(C3)
Page Numbers: 1-20
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: DC-AC INVERTER CXA-L0612-VJL
Part Manual
Description: DC-AC INVERTER CXA-L0612-VJL
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: TRANSFORMER POWER P
Part Manual
Description: TRANSFORMER POWER PT-094
Part Details
Common Names:


Part Number: Discontinued
Description: OBS PCB NO 2136
Part Manual
Description: PCB NO.2135
Part Details
Common Names:
P/N 261-0701-0 (OBS) REPLACED BY P/N 261-0703-7 (PCB NO 2135).


Description: PCB NO 4087
Part Manual
Page Numbers: 1-05 1-17 2-01
Part Details
Common Names:
P/N 261-0758-1 REPLACED BY P/N 261-0766-1 (PCB NO.4087).


Part Manual
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: PANEL KEYBOARD KX-21
Part Manual
Description: PANEL KEYBOARD KX-21
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: TIE WRAP CV-100 REF 266-4051-9
Part Manual
Description: TIE WRAP CV-100
Page Numbers: 1-15
Part Details
Common Names:
USE P/N 266-4051-9 (TIE WRAP T18R).


Description: FUSE 250V3.15A ST4-3.15A-N1(10/PK)
Part Manual
Description: FUSE 250V3.15A ST4-3.15A-N1
Page Numbers: 1-05
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: FUSE 2A 250V NO 19195 (EUROPE)(10/PK)
Part Manual
Description: FUSE 250V2A NO. 19195 (EUROPE)
Page Numbers: 1-05
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: THERMAL PROTECTOR T70AR1U1N
Part Manual
Description: THERMAL PROTECTOR T70AR1U1N
Page Numbers: 1-14 1-16 2-01
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: FAN FBA09A12HAZ
Part Manual
Description: FAN FBA09A12HAZ
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: MOTOR K45 STP-42D213
Part Manual
Description: MOTOR STP-42D213
Page Numbers: 1-20
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: PRINTER FTP421MCL001
Part Manual
Description: PRINTER FTP-421MCL001
Page Numbers: 1-11
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: SWITCHING REGULATOR VS15B-5 [KX-21]
Part Manual
Description: SWITCHING REGULATOR VS15B-5
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: SWITCHING REGULATOR VS50B-12 [KX-21]
Part Manual
Description: SWITCHING REGULATOR VS50B-12
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: FRONT COVER KX-21
Part Manual
Description: FRONT COVER KX-21
Page Numbers: 1-03
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: SHAFT NO 277
Part Manual
Description: SHAFT NO.277
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: BELT TIMING 144MXL-6-4
Part Manual
Description: TIMING BELT 144MXL-6.4
Page Numbers: 1-20
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: SCREW BINDING 100 PER BAG
Part Manual
Description: SCREW BINDING M3X6 (SUS)
Page Numbers: 1-14
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: SCREW BINDING 100/PK M3X4
Part Manual
Description: SCREW BINDING M3X4 (SUS)
Page Numbers: 1-14
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: FIXING MATERIAL NO 22
Part Manual
Description: FIXING MATERIAL NO. 22
Page Numbers: 1-07
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: FIXING MATERIAL NO 639
Part Manual
Description: FIXING MATERIAL NO.639
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: SHAFT FIXTURE NO 60
Part Manual
Description: SHAFT FIXTURE NO.60
Page Numbers: 1-20
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: SLEEVE METAL MS-06
Part Manual
Description: SLEEVE METAL MS-06
Page Numbers: 1-14
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: BELLOWS NO 2 WITH METAL
Part Manual
Description: BELLOWS WITH METAL NO.2
Page Numbers: 1-10
Part Details
Common Names:
367-8202-2 (OBS) REPLACED BY 367-8205-3 (BELLOWS WITH METAL NO. 5).


Description: RINSE CUP NO 35
Part Manual
Description: RINSING CUP NO. 35
Page Numbers: 1-20
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: FITTING NO 9
Part Manual
Description: FITTING NO. 9-A
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: NIPPLE NO 73(PC=1EA)
Part Manual
Description: NIPPLE NO. 73
Page Numbers: 1-13
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: FITTING BN-6X4XPT 1/8 BSN(PC=1EA)
Part Manual
Description: FITTING BN-6 X 4 X PT 1/8 BSN
Page Numbers: 1-14
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: FITTING BL-6 X 4 X PT 1/8 BSN(PC=1EA)
Part Manual
Description: FITTING BL-6 X 4 X PT 1/8 BSN
Page Numbers: 1-16
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: TUBE POLYURETHANE 1.8MMX3.4MM 10MT/PK
Part Manual
Description: TUBE POLYURETHANE 1.8MMX3.4MM
Page Numbers: 1-13
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: TUBE POLYURETHANE 4MMIDX6MMOD 25MT/PK
Part Manual
Description: TUBE POLYURETHANE 4MMIDX6MMOD
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: TUBING TEFLON O.8MM ID X 1.8 5MT/PK
Part Manual
Description: TUBE TEFLON 0.8MMID X 1.8MMOD
Page Numbers: 1-15
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: TUBING NO 103
Part Manual
Description: TUBING NO.103
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: PINCH VALVE K-1 ASSEMBLY
Part Manual
Description: PINCH VALVE K-1 ASSEMBLY
Page Numbers: 1-07
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: FILTER K45 NO 9(PC=1EA)
Part Manual
Description: FILTER NO. 9
Page Numbers: 1-10
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: RELIEF VALVE 247L-1V-1/8Z171
Part Manual
Description: RELIEF VALVE 247L-1V-1/8Z171
Page Numbers: 1-10
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: RELIEF VALVE 247L4-1VZH
Part Manual
Description: RELIEF VALVE 247L4-1VZH
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: AIR FILTER F1000-6-B
Part Manual
Description: AIR FILTER F1000-6-B
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: GLASS CHAMBER GC-37
Part Manual
Description: GLASS CHAMBER GC-37
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: AIR CYLINDER SE9 T-2437
Part Manual
Description: AIR CYLINDER T-2437
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: KIT VACUUM PARTS
Part Manual
Description: VACUUM PARTS SET FOR PSL-21
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: PRESSURE PARTS SET FOR PSL-21
Part Manual
Description: PRESSURE PARTS SET FOR PSL-21
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: OBS VACUUM PARTS SET FOR 21-Z-PSV
Part Manual
Description: VACUUM PARTS SET FOR 21Z-PSV
Page Numbers: 1-14
Part Details
Common Names:
P/N 443-6880-2 (OBS) USE P/N 443-6865-6 (KIT VACUUM PARTS).


Description: OBS PRESSURE PARTS SET FOR 21Z-PSP
Part Manual
Description: PRESSURE PARTS SET FOR 21Z-PSP
Page Numbers: 1-14
Part Details
Common Names:
P/N 443-6881-6 (OBS) USE P/N 443-6866-0 (PRESSURE PARTS SET FOR PSL-21).


Description: COMPRESSOR PSL-21
Part Manual
Description: PISTON PUMP PSL-21
Page Numbers: 1-16
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: OBS PISTON PUMP PSL-212
Part Manual
Description: PISTON PUMP PSL-21Z
Page Numbers: 1-14
Part Details
Common Names:
P/N 443-6954-1 (OBS) REF P/N 981-0771-7 (KX-21 PNEUMATIC REPLACE KIT).


Description: AIR VALVE WTKV012
Part Manual
Page Numbers: 1-09
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: AIR VALVE WTKV012-E1-PLL-DC12
Part Manual
Description: AIR VALVE WTKV012- E1-PLL-DC12
Page Numbers: 1-09
Part Details
Common Names:


Part Manual
Page Numbers: 1-09
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: AIR VALVE WTKV011-E1-PLL-DC12
Part Manual
Description: AIR VALVE WTKV011- E1-PLL-DC12
Page Numbers: 1-09
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: END PLATE WTKV010-R
Part Manual
Description: END PLATE WTKV010-R
Page Numbers: 1-09
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: END PLATE WTKV010-L
Part Manual
Description: END PLATE WTKV010-L
Page Numbers: 1-09
Part Details
Common Names:


Part Manual
Page Numbers: 1-09
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: AIR VALVE WTKV023-4E1-PLL-DC12
Part Manual
Page Numbers: 1-09
Part Details
Common Names:


Part Manual
Page Numbers: 1-09
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: SILENCER SLM-8A SL-1/4
Part Manual
Description: SILENCER SLW-8A (SL-1/4)
Page Numbers: 1-16
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: DIAPHRAGM PUMP NO 5 ASSY KX-21
Part Manual
Description: DIAPHRAGM PUMP ASSY NO.5 (1.0)
Part Details
Common Names:
REPLACED BY P/N 973-2921-8 (DIAPHRAGM PUMP NO 50 ASSY).


Description: TRANSDUCER NO 3 ASSY
Part Manual
Description: TRANSDUCER NO. 3 ASSY (RBC)
Page Numbers: 1-13
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: SWITCH NO 83 ASSEMBLY
Part Manual
Description: SWITCH NO.83 ASSEMBLY
Page Numbers: 1-03
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: DIAPHRAGM PUMP NO 34 ASSY
Part Manual
Description: DIAPHRAGM PUMP NO.34 ASSY
Part Details
Common Names:
USE REMAINING STOCK THEN USE P/N 973-2911-1 (DIAPHRAGM PUMP NO 49 ASSY).


Description: LIMIT SWITCH NO 3 ASSY
Part Manual
Description: LIMIT SWITCH NO. 3 ASSY
Page Numbers: 1-20
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: FAN ASSEMBLY NO 19
Part Manual
Description: FAN ASSEMBLY NO.19
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: WASTE CHAMBER NO 35 ASSY
Part Manual
Description: WASTE CHAMBER NO. 35 ASSY (C2/SF)
Page Numbers: 1-07
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: DIAPHRAGM PUMP NO 45 ASSY (0.5)
Part Manual
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: DRIVE MECHANISM NO 58(C1/KX-21)
Part Manual
Description: DRIVE MECHANISM NO.58 ASSY
Page Numbers: 1-07 1-20 2-01
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO 6
Part Manual
Description: SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO. 6
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: SAMPLE ROTOR VALVE NO 17 ASSY
Part Manual
Description: SAMPLE ROTOR VALVE NO.17 ASSY
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: SRV FIXED VALVE NO 28-LASSY
Part Manual
Description: SRV FIXED VALVE NO.28-L ASSY
Page Numbers: 1-07
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: SRV FIXED VALVE NO 28-R ASSY
Part Manual
Description: SRV FIXED VALVE NO.28-R ASSY
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: TRANSDUCER NO 8 ASSY
Part Manual
Description: TRANSDUCER NO.8 ASSY
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: HGB UNIT KX-21
Part Manual
Description: HGB UNIT KX-21
Page Numbers: 1-13
Part Details
Common Names:


Part Manual
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: THERMISTOR NO 37 ASSY
Part Manual
Description: THERMISTOR ASSY NO.37
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: DIAPHRAGM PUMP NO 49 ASSY
Part Manual
Page Numbers: 1-07 1-09 2-01
Part Details
Common Names:
USE REMAINING STOCK OF P/N 923-5541-4 (DIAPHRAGM PUMP NO 34 ASSY) FIRST.


Description: OBS DIAPHRAGM PUMP NO 50 ASSY
Part Manual
Page Numbers: 1-07 1-09 2-01
Part Details
Common Names:
REPLACED BY P/N 873-0647-7 (DIAPHRAGM PUMP NO 5 ASSY KX-21).


Part Manual
Page Numbers: 1-07 1-09 2-01
Part Details
Common Names:


Part Manual
Page Numbers: 1-07 1-09 2-01
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: WASTE CHAMBER NO 39
Part Manual
Description: WASTE CHAMBER NO.39 ASSY
Page Numbers: 1-07
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: OBS PNEUMATIC UNIT KX-21
Part Manual
Description: PNEUMATIC UNIT KX-21
Page Numbers: 1-07
Part Details
Common Names:
P/N 973-2981-1 (OBS) USE P/N 981-0771-7 (KX-21 PNEUMATIC REPLACE KIT).


Description: PNEUMATIC UNIT KX-21 (W/PSL-21
Part Manual
Description: PNEUMATIC UNIT KX-21 (W/PSL-21
Part Details
Common Names:
USE REMAINING STOCK THEN USE P/N 443-6953-7 (COMPRESSOR PSL-21).


Description: KX-21 PRINTER
Part Manual
Description: PRINTER UNIT KX-21
Page Numbers: 1-03
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: ROM 1KX2F ASSY
Part Manual
Description: ROM 1KX2F ASSY
Page Numbers: 1-05
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: S\ KX-21 HOST OUTPUT UNIT
Part Manual
Description: OUTPUT UNIT NO. 1 KX-21
Page Numbers: 1-05
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: KX-21 PNEUMATIC REPLACE KIT
Part Manual
Description: KX-21 PNEUMATIC REPLACE KIT
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: S\ KX-21 PRINTER UNIT
Part Manual
Description: KX-21 PRINTER UNIT
Page Numbers: 1-03
Part Details
Common Names:


Part Number:
Description:
Part Manual
Part Number: 281-7226-1B
Description: PRINTER FTP-421MCL571
Page Numbers: 1-11
Part Details
Common Names:
USE P/N 281-7226-1 (PRINTER FTP421MCL001).


Description: SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO7 RPLCMT PC=1EA
Part Manual
Description: SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO. 7 (PM)
Page Numbers: 1-07
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: OBS SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO 7 (PC=1 EA)
Part Manual
Description: SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO. 7
Page Numbers: 1-07
Part Details
Common Names:
USE P/N 001-0331-0 (SAMPLE ROTOR FIXTURE NO7 RPLCMT PC=1EA).


Description: OBS PCB NO.2150
Part Manual
Part Details
Common Names:
REPLACED BY P/N 261-0703-7 (PCB NO 2135).


Description: PCB NO. 6370
Part Manual
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: FRONT COVER
Part Manual
Description: FRONT COVER KX-21N
Page Numbers: 1-03
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: UPPER SIDE COVER KX-21N
Part Manual
Description: COVER UPPER/SIDE KX-21N
Page Numbers: 1-03
Part Details
Common Names:


Part Manual
Description: SHAFT NO. 276
Page Numbers: 1-07
Part Details
Common Names:


Part Manual
Description: SHAFT NO. 207
Page Numbers: 1-07
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: PROGRAM CARD 1KXNH ASSY
Part Manual
Description: PROGRAM CARD 1KXNH ASSY
Page Numbers: 1-05
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: WIRING CORD NO 2969
Part Manual
Description: WIRING CORD NO.2969
Page Numbers: 1-19
Part Details
Common Names:


Part Manual
Page Numbers: 1-19
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: WIRING CORD NO 2971
Part Manual
Page Numbers: 1-19
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: CHAMBER NO. 17
Part Manual
Description: CHAMBER NO.17
Page Numbers: 1-10
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: S\VOLUME WITH WIRING NO.14
Part Manual
Description: VOLUME WITH WIRING NO.14
Page Numbers: 1-03
Part Details
Common Names:


Part Manual
Part Details
Common Names:


Part Manual
Part Details
Common Names:


Description: FUSE 0.5 AMP 125V UL-TSC-0.5A (10/PK)
Part Manual
Description: FUSE 120V0.5A UL-TSC-0.5A
Page Numbers: 1-11
Part Details
Common Names:

APPENDIX B INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
B.1 PCB DIP SWITCH (S1) SETTING VERIFICATION ................................................. B-1
B.2 START UP SEQUENCE ........................................................................................... B-1
KX-21 S/M April 1998

Follow the installation procedures written in the Operator’s Manual.
The additional information required for installation is given below.
B.1 PCB DIP SWITCH (S1) SETTING VERIFICATION

Refer to Section 4.4.2. PCB No. 6363 for the DIP switch settings.
B.2 START UP SEQUENCE

After the initial power ON at installation, some system set up are required.
(1) Priming sequence:

Access the “Setting Seq.” program by selecting 9. Service - 2. Service Seq. - 1. Setting Seq.
Refer to Section 5.5.1. Setting Sequence of this manual for information.
(2) Date setting:

Access the “Date/Time” program by selecting 6. Settings - 2. Date/Time.
Refer to KX-21 Operator’s Manual, Chapter 10 for information.
(3) Cycle counter reset:

Access the “initialize” program by selecting 9. Service - 3. Settings - 1. Initialize - 1. Cycle
Counter.
Refer to Section 5.6.1. Initialize of this manual for information.
NOTE: Cycle counter must be reset after setting the current date, since the date of last
maintenance will also be reset.
KX-21 S/M B-1 April 1998

KX-21 Compressor (for PSL-21) Replacement Procedure
This procedure applies to the replacement of Compressor PSL-21Z to the new PSL-21.
1. Replacement Parts
KX-21 Compressor (for PSL-21) 1

Tube Teflon 1.8x0.8 (700 mm) 1 (Part No. 442-5418-8)
Tie Wrap CV-100 5 (Part No. 266-4461-8)
2. Replacement Procedure
The outline of the replacement procedure is as follows.

2-1. Replacing Orifice Tubing on Pressure Side
2-2. Deleting Silencer
2-3. Replacing Pneumatic Unit
2-4. Tubing Layout
2-5. Installing Top Side Cover
2-1. Replacing Orifice Tubing on Pressure Side
1) Remove KX-21 Top Side Cover and loosen four screws fixing Regulator Section at the
left side panel to pull out the Regulator Section.
At this time, disconnect three tubes connected to Compressor.
2) Coil Tube Teflon (1.8x0.8, 700 mm) included in the replacement parts kit five times
so that the diameter of the roll will be 35 mm and remaining tubing will be
approximately 70 mm in length from end to end (see fig.1).
Fix the coiled Tube Teflon with two or three Tie Wraps.
- 1/6 -
3) Disconnect Tube Teflon (1.8x0.8 (1 m)) at rear of the relief valve on Regulator
Section and replace it by Orifice Tubing assembled in Step 2) and secure with Tie Wrap.
(See Figure 1 below.)
<Reference>
Remain Tube Silicone inserted by Tube Teflon at the T-Joint and replace only Tube
Teflon, which is easier way. Make sure not to damage Tube Silicone.
Tube Polyurethane 6x4

Tie Wrap CV-100
Tube Teflon 1.8x0.8 (700 mm)
Tie with Tube

Polyurethane
Figure 1: Installing Orifice Tubing
2-2. Deleting Silencer
1) Remove Silencer fixed on the rear of Regulator Section with Tie Wrap and discard.
Disconnect the tube at the Silencer side.
- 2/6 -
2-3 Replacing Pneumatic Unit
1) Remove two screws (M4x6) fixing the compressor and two Wiring Cord connected to
Pneumatic Unit and take out the compressor for PSL-21Z.
2) Remove two fixing screws (M4x16) for the shipment of the compressor for PSL-21,
and install it on KX-21 using the reverse procedure of the above step 1.
Pay attention to the Wiring Cord position.
KX-21 Chassis
(Left Side Panel)
Make sure that

Compressor is not put
on this projected part.
KX-21 Compressor
Screw Binding
M4x6 SUS (2)
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Figure 2: Installing Compressor
Install KX-21 Compressor on Chassis using two Screw Binding

M4x6 (SUS).
　　　　　
- 3/6 -
2-4. Tubing Layout
1) Connect Tubing with black marking (Pressure), Tubing with green marking (Vacuum)
and Tubing with no marking (the longer one not connected to the silencer) coming
from Regulator Section to P, V and F ports of Compressor respectively.
KX-21 Chassis
(Left Side Panel)
KX-21 Compressor
Connect
(P)
(F)
Tube Polyurethane (V)
6x4 (black marking)
① Connect
Tube Polyurethane
③ 6x4 (green marking)
②
KX-21 Tube Polyurethane 6x4

Regulator Section (without marking)
Hydraulic Connector No. 21
Figure 3: Installing KX-21 Regulator Section (1)
① Connect Tube Polyurethane 6x4 (with black marking) coming from Regulator
Section to Fitting (P) of Compressor.
② Connect Tube Polyurethane 6x4 (with Hydraulic Connector (without marking))
coming from Regulator Section to Fitting (F) of Compressor.
③ Connect Tube Polyurethane 6x4 (with green marking) coming from Regulator
Section to Fitting (V) of Compressor.
　
- 4/6 -
2) Install Regulator Section on KX-21 Chassis and connect the tube previously connected
to the Silencer to the open port of the tank at the lower side of Compressor.
In case when the round hole of

Regulator Section frame is out
1111
1
2
of the position of Regulator
3
3
5
4
6
5
Section Chassis, fix it at the
7
6
7
12
8
12
8
13
14
correct position and install
13
14
15
16
15
16
17
18
17
18
19
20
19
20
21
21
３
２３
２
１００
１
Ａ
Ａ
Hang the frame

on four screws
and tighten
KX-21 Chassis
(Left Side Panel) Connect
Regulator Section
⑤
Frame
２
２５５０
０ｍ
ｍｍ
ｍＨ
Ｈｇ
ｇ
Regulator Section Chassis
Tube Polyurethane 6x4

KX-21 Regulator Section
(without marking)
Figure 4: Installing KX-21 Regulator Section (2)
④　Hang KX-21Regulator Section on the chassis using four screws (Screw Binding M3x8
SUS) and tighten the screws.
⑤　Connect Tube Polyurethane 6x4(without marking) to the nipple on the Pneumatic Unit
tank.
- 5/6 -
2-5. Installation of Top Side Cover
Install Top Side Cover. Be sure not to pinch tube beside Pneumatic Unit between tank
and Top Side Cover.(Tie wrap can be used.)
3. Confirmation of Operation
Confirm the operation as follows.

3-1. Turn Power ON
3-2. Confirm and Adjust pressure value
3-3. Confirm the operation
3-1. Turn Power ON
Turn KX-21 Power ON, and display Ready mode by skipping Auto Rinse.
(Press the start switch when turning ON the power switch and keep it pressed until
a beep sounds.)
3-2. Confirm and Adjust pressure value
Enter the Status Display menu Confirm and adjust following pressure and vacuum.
(Refer to KX-21 Operator’s Manual)
2
Pressure ０．５　±　０．１　kg/cm
Vacuum ２５０　±　２０　mmHg
3-3. Confirm the operation
By measuring control blood, confirm that no system error occurs during operation.
Also verify that analysis results are normal.

- 6/6 -
KX-21 SERIES SERVICE MANUAL
GENERAL CONTENTS
1.1 NAME AND MODEL NUMBER........................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 SYSTEM ORGANIZATION .............................................................................................. 1-1
1.3 ELECTRICAL RATINGS .................................................................................................. 1-1
1.3.1 Rated Voltage ........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3.2 Line Frequency ......................................................................................... 1-1
1.3.3 Power Consumption.................................................................................. 1-1
1.4 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT .......................................................................................... 1-2
1.5 INTENDED USE .............................................................................................................. 1-2
1.6 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 1-2
1.6.1 Analysis and Display Range...................................................................... 1-2
1.6.2 Accuracy ................................................................................................... 1-3
1.6.3 Reproducibility........................................................................................... 1-3
1.6.4 Linearity..................................................................................................... 1-3
1.6.5 Carryover .................................................................................................. 1-4
1.6.6 Stability...................................................................................................... 1-4
1.6.7 Throughput................................................................................................ 1-5
1.6.8 Required Sample and Reagent Volumes.................................................. 1-5
1.6.9 Graphic LCD/Panel Keyboard................................................................... 1-5
3 1.6.10 Sample ID Number ................................................................................... 1-5
1.7 FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.7.1 Data Storage ............................................................................................. 1-6
1.7.2 Printer........................................................................................................ 1-6
1.7.3 Serial Interface .......................................................................................... 1-6
1.7.4 Histogram Analysis ................................................................................... 1-6
1.7.5 Quality Control .......................................................................................... 1-7
1.7.6 Calibration ................................................................................................. 1-7
1.7.7 Abnormality Detection Function ................................................................ 1-7
1.8 START-UP ....................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.9 SHUT DOWN................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.10 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................... 1-9
1.11 SAFETY PROTECTION ................................................................................................ 1-10
1.12 ACOUSTIC NOISE ........................................................................................................ 1-10
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... 1-10
1.14 REAGENTS ................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.15 STORAGE CONDITIONS.............................................................................................. 1-10

2.1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM...................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Block Diagram (Whole Blood Mode)......................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Block Diagram (Pre-diluted Mode)............................................................ 2-1
2.2 ANALYSIS FLOW ............................................................................................................ 2-2
2.2.1 WBC/HGB Analysis Flow.......................................................................... 2-2
2.2.2 RBC/PLT Analysis Flow ............................................................................ 2-2
KX-21 S/M i Revised June 2000

2.3 SAMPLE FLOW IN SRV .................................................................................................. 2-3
2.3.1 Sample Path.............................................................................................. 2-3
2.3.2 Sample Path (Whole Blood Mode)............................................................ 2-4
2.3.3 Sample Path (Pre-diluted Mode)............................................................... 2-4
2.4 SOLENOID VALVE LOCATION....................................................................................... 2-5
2.4.1 Valve Unit Tubing Connections................................................................. 2-6
2.5 DIAPHRAGM PUMP LOCATION..................................................................................... 2-8
2.6 PNEUMATIC SYSTEM .................................................................................................... 2-9
2.6.1 Sample Aspiration System ........................................................................ 2-9
2.6.2 Vacuum System ........................................................................................ 2-9
2.6.3 Pressure System..................................................................................... 2-10
2.7 WASTE CHAMBER TUBING......................................................................................... 2-10
2.8 RINSE CUP.................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.9 RBC DETECTOR UNIT ................................................................................................. 2-12
2.10 WBC DETECTOR UNIT ................................................................................................ 2-12
2.11 SRV UNIT ...................................................................................................................... 2-13
2.12 HYDRAULIC FLOW DESCRIPTION ............................................................................. 2-14
2.12.1 Whole Blood Mode.................................................................................. 2-14
2.12.2 Pre-Diluted Mode .................................................................................... 2-56
2.13 PNEUMATIC & HYDRAULIC PARTS............................................................................ 2-60
3.1 PCB LOCATION .............................................................................................................. 3-1

3.2 BLOCK DIAGRAM ........................................................................................................... 3-2
3 3.3 PCB NO. 2135/PCB NO.2150 (ANALOG MAIN) ............................................................. 3-4
3 3.4 PCB NO. 6363/PCB NO.6370 (MAIN CPU)..................................................................... 3-9
3.5 PCB NO. 6350 (PRINTER DRIVER BOARD)................................................................ 3-20
3.6 POWER SUPPLY UNIT (PCB NO. 4087)...................................................................... 3-22
4.1 STANDARD SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT ..................................................................... 4-1

4 4.1.1 WBC and RBC Sensitivity Adjustment...................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 PLT Sensitivity Adjustment ....................................................................... 4-5
4.2 HGB ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................................................ 4-7
4.3 CLOG LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................... 4-9
4.4 PCB CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT .......................................................................... 4-10
3 4.4.1 PCB No. 2135 (KX-21)/No. 2150 (KX-21N) ............................................ 4-10
3 4.4.2 PCB No. 6363 (KX-21)............................................................................ 4-11
3 4.4.3 PCB No. 6370 (KX-21N) ......................................................................... 4-12
4.4.4 PCB No. 4087 (Power Supply Unit) ........................................................ 4-14
4.5 PROGRAM VERSION UP PROCEDURES ................................................................... 4-15
3 4.5.1 Program Version Up (KX-21) .................................................................. 4-15
3 4.5.2 Program Version Up (KX-21N) ............................................................... 4-16
4.6 MECHANICAL PARTS ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................... 4-17
4.6.1 SRV Position Adjustment........................................................................ 4-17
4.6.2 Rinse Cup Position Adjustment .............................................................. 4-18
KX-21 S/M ii Revised July 2000

5.1 SPECIAL MODES............................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 ENTERING THE MAINTENANCE MODES..................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 Maintenance Mode.................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.2 Factory Maintenance Mode....................................................................... 5-1
5.2.3 Access to Maintenance Modes ................................................................. 5-2
5.3 MENU CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................... 5-3
5.4 CLOG REMOVAL ............................................................................................................ 5-4
5.5 SERVICE SEQUENCE .................................................................................................... 5-4
5.5.1 Setting Sequence...................................................................................... 5-5
5.5.2 Deprime Sequence ................................................................................... 5-5
5.5.3 Gain Adjustment ....................................................................................... 5-6
5.5.4 Control Mode............................................................................................. 5-6
5.5.5 Calibrator Mode......................................................................................... 5-6
5.5.6 Continuous Mode ...................................................................................... 5-7
5.5.7 Clog Adjustment (Clog Voltage Adjustment Sequence) ........................... 5-7
5.6 SETTINGS ....................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.6.1 Initialize ..................................................................................................... 5-8
5.6.2 Change...................................................................................................... 5-9
3 5.6.3 Sysmex Support (KX-21N only) .............................................................. 5-13
5.6.4 Print Settings........................................................................................... 5-13
5.7 TEST OPERATION........................................................................................................ 5-14
5.7.1 DP Test Operation .................................................................................. 5-14
5.7.2 SV Test Operation .................................................................................. 5-14
3 5.7.3 HC Output Test (KX-21)/Output Test (HC)(KX-21N) .............................. 5-15
3 5.7.4 Output Test (DP)(KX-21N only) .............................................................. 5-15
3 5.7.5 Output Test (GP)(KX-21N only) .............................................................. 5-15
3 5.7.6 IP Output Test (KX-21)/Output Test (IP)(KX-21N).................................. 5-15
5.8 SERVICE DATA............................................................................................................. 5-16
5.8.1 Status Display (Sensor & SV Status) ...................................................... 5-17
5.9 SPECIAL SEQUENCE................................................................................................... 5-18
5.9.1 Factory Rinse Sequence......................................................................... 5-18
5.9.2 Shipping Sequence ................................................................................. 5-18
5.9.3 Factory Initialize ...................................................................................... 5-18
5.9.4 Factory Settings ...................................................................................... 5-20
5.9.5 Raw Data Output..................................................................................... 5-20
5.9.6 Debugger ................................................................................................ 5-21
5.10 PRINT SETTINGS ......................................................................................................... 5-21
SECTION 6 ERROR MESSAGE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.1 [HELP] Key Function................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.2 Action Message Screen ............................................................................ 6-3
6.1.3 Error Code Function.................................................................................. 6-3
6.2 SENSOR LOCATION....................................................................................................... 6-4
KX-21 S/M iii Revised June 2000

6.3 ERROR MESSAGE ........................................................................................................ 6-5
6.3.1 Pressure................................................................................................... 6-5
2
6.3.1.1 Pressure/Vac Error [0.5 kg/cm Pressure Error] ...................... 6-5
6.3.1.2 Pressure/Vac Error [250 mmHg Vacuum Error]....................... 6-6
6.3.1.3 Pressure/Vac Error [Pressure Lower Error].............................. 6-8
6.3.2 Chamber ................................................................................................ 6-10
6.3.2.1 Waste Not Draining ................................................................ 6-10
6.3.2.2 Replenish Diluent.................................................................... 6-12
6.3.2.3 Replenish Lyse ....................................................................... 6-14
6.3.3 Printers................................................................................................... 6-16
3 6.3.3.1 No Printer Paper [Built-in Printer (IP)] (KX-21) ....................... 6-16
3 6.3.3.1 IP paper empty [Abnormal IP] (KX-21N) ................................ 6-16
3 6.3.3.2 Printer Error [Built-in Printer (IP)] (KX-21) .............................. 6-18
3 6.3.3.2 Error on IP [Abnormal IP] (KX-21N) ....................................... 6-18
3 6.3.3.3 GP printout error [Abnormal GP] (KX-21N only)..................... 6-20
3 6.3.3.4 GP paper empty [Abnormal GP] (KX-21N only) ..................... 6-22
3 6.3.3.5 DP printout error [Abnormal DP] (KX-21N only) ..................... 6-24
3 6.3.3.6 Print Error (KX-21 only) .......................................................... 6-26
6.3.4 Motor ...................................................................................................... 6-28
6.3.4.1 Rinse Motor Error [Rinse Motor Function Error] ..................... 6-28
6.3.5 Temperature............................................................................................ 6-30
6.3.5.1 Room Temp. High .................................................................. 6-30
6.3.5.2 Room Temp. Low ................................................................... 6-30
6.3.6 Analysis .................................................................................................. 6-32
6.3.6.1 Background Error ................................................................... 6-32
6.3.6.2 Sampling Error [RBC Sampling Error] .................................... 6-34
6.3.6.3 Sampling Error [PLT Sampling Error] ..................................... 6-34
6.3.6.4 Sampling Error [WBC Sampling Error] ................................... 6-34
6.3.6.5 Sampling Error [RBC CCSD Noise Error]............................... 6-36
6.3.6.6 Sampling Error [PLT CCSD Noise Error]................................ 6-36
6.3.6.7 Sampling Error [WBC CCSD Noise Error].............................. 6-36
6.3.6.8 HGB Error ............................................................................... 6-38
6.3.6.9 WBC Aperture Clog ................................................................ 6-40
6.3.6.10 RBC Aperture Clog ................................................................. 6-40
6.3.6.11 Analysis Error [WBC/HGB Error (Tri-modal Particle)] ............ 6-42
6.3.6.12 Analysis Error [Detect Sensitivity Error
(Electrical Conductivity)] ......................................................... 6-43
6.3.7 Memory .................................................................................................. 6-44
6.3.7.1 Memory Error [RAM Error]...................................................... 6-44
6.3.7.2 Memory Error [ROM Error] ..................................................... 6-44
6.3.7.3 Setup Data Error..................................................................... 6-46
6.3.8 Host Output ............................................................................................ 6-48
6.3.8.1 HOST Comm. Error................................................................ 6-48
3 6.3.8.2 HOST Comm. Error 2 (Reserved) .......................................... 6-50
6.3.9 QC ........................................................................................................... 6-52
6.3.9.1 QC Error [L-J Control Error].................................................... 6-52
6.3.9.2 QC Error [ X Control Error] ................................................... 6-52
6.3.9.3 Calibration Error...................................................................... 6-54
6.3.10 Maintenance............................................................................................ 6-56
6.3.10.1 Clean SRV .............................................................................. 6-56
6.3.10.2 Clean W. Chamber (Clean Waste Chamber)......................... 6-58
6.3.10.3 Clean Transducer ................................................................... 6-60
KX-21 S/M iv Revised June 2000

SECTION 7 SCHEMATICS
KX-21 WIRING DIAGRAM ......................................................................................................... 7-1

KX-21 TUBING DIAGRAM ......................................................................................................... 7-2
KX-21 HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM .................................................................................................. 7-3
KX-21 POWER SUPPLY UNIT (100V) DIAGRAM .................................................................... 7-4
KX-21 POWER SUPPLY UNIT (200V) DIAGRAM .................................................................... 7-5
KX-21 TIMING CHART (1/7) ...................................................................................................... 7-6
KX-21 TIMING CHART (2/7) ...................................................................................................... 7-7
KX-21 TIMING CHART (3/7) ...................................................................................................... 7-8
KX-21 TIMING CHART (4/7) ...................................................................................................... 7-9
KX-21 TIMING CHART (5/7) .................................................................................................... 7-10
KX-21 TIMING CHART (6/7) .................................................................................................... 7-11
KX-21 TIMING CHART (7/7) .................................................................................................... 7-12
3 KX-21N WIRING DIAGRAM .................................................................................................... 7-13
APPENDIX A PARTS LIST

B.1 PCB DIP SWITCH (S1) SETTING VERIFICATION......................................................... B-1
B.2 START UP SEQUENCE .................................................................................................. B-1
KX-21 S/M v Revised June 2000

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
KX-21
SYSMEX CORPORATION
KOBE, JAPAN
Copyright © 1999 by SYSMEX CORPORATION
All right reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced First Edition: March 1999
in any form or by any electronic or mechanical means,
including information storage and retrieval systems, without
written permission from the publisher. Printed in Japan
KX-21 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................. 1
SECTION 2 LIST OF TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE .............................................................. 1
2.1 Error Messages (Alphabetical Order) ............................................................................. 1

2.2 Observed Phenomena .................................................................................................... 1
(1) Entire System ...................................................................................................... 1
(2) Software (Program or Specifications) ................................................................... 1
(3) Hydraulic System ................................................................................................ 2
(4) Pneumatic System .............................................................................................. 2
(5) Electronic System ............................................................................................... 2
(6) Sample Processing ............................................................................................. 2
(7) Analysis Errors/Incorrect Data Report ................................................................. 2
(8) Printer or Host Computer .................................................................................... 3
(9) Manufacturing/Transportation .............................................................................. 3
(10) Other ................................................................................................................... 3
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ............................................................................ 4
0.5 kg/cm2 ERROR ................................................................................................................... 4

250 mmHg ERROR .................................................................................................................. 4
BLACK PRINT OUT .................................................................................................................. 5
ENTERS SLEEP MODE WITH PNEUMATIC ERROR .............................................................. 5
HARDWARE DAMAGE DURING TRANSPORTATION .............................................................. 5
HIGH BACKGROUND, PLT ....................................................................................................... 5
HIGH BACKGROUND, WBC ..................................................................................................... 6
KX DOES NOT START UP ....................................................................................................... 7
LCD PROBLEM ........................................................................................................................ 7
PNEUMATIC UNIT IS NOISY ...................................................................................................... 8
PNEUMATIC UNIT SHIPPING SUPPORT .................................................................................. 8
PNEUMATIC UNIT STOPS ........................................................................................................ 9
SAMPLE ASPIRATION IMPOSSIBLE ........................................................................................ 9
SMOKE FROM PRINTER BOARD ........................................................................................... 9
WASTE NOT DRAINING ERROR ............................................................................................. 9
WBC COUNT IMPOSSIBLE .................................................................................................... 10
WL FLAG INCREASE .............................................................................................................. 10
SECTION 4 TECHNICAL INFORMATION .............................................................................. 11
4.1 Reagent Consumption ................................................................................................. 11

4.2 DIP Switch Setting (DIP SW S1 on PCB No. 6363) ...................................................... 12
4.3 PCB Location ............................................................................................................... 12
4.4 Sensor Location ............................................................................................................ 12
4.5 Resolved Program Problems (Versions 00-02 through 00-12) ........................................ 13
4.6 Valve Unit Tubing .......................................................................................................... 16
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION
The KX-21 Troubleshooting Guide is composed based on the troubles reported from the market in
1998 and January 1999. This describes the causes and its troubleshooting methods and the
necessary information to resolve the problems.
Also some helpful information for servicing is given in this manual.
SECTION 2 LIST OF TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
2.1 Error Messages (Alphabetical Order)

Reported Error Message S ee p ag e
1 Background Error 5, 6
2 Clean SRV/Transducer/Waste Chamber 15
3 Host Communication Error, Off-line 14
4 Power Fail 15
5 Pressure/Vac Error (0.5 kg/cm2 Pressure Error) 4
6 Pressure/Vac Error 4
7 Printer Error 14
8 Replenish Lyse 14
9 Waste Not Draining 9
2.2 Observed Phenomena
NOTE: • [---] in “# of CCHF” column indicates that the problem is reported by Fax or Q&A sys-
tem, etc. but no Customer’s Complaint Handling Form (CCHF) has been submitted.
• [---] in “See page” column indicates the problem is under investigation or observation as
of February 1, 1999.
• Some of the problems are categorized into several of below.
(1) Entire System
Observed Phenomena # of C C H F S ee p ag e
1 System lock up during start-up. 1 4, 14
2 System enters the Sleep Mode even when a pneumatic error 1 5
occurs. Pressing Start Switch cannot restart the pneumatic
unit.
3 System does not start up. 2 7
4 Lateral stripes appear on the LCD. 3 7
5 Reagent consumption is too much. --- 11
6 Power Fail message appears when powered ON after the --- 15
power OFF due to error recovery instruction.
(2) Software (Program or Specifications)

Obse rv e d Phe nom e na # of CCHF Se e page
1 Enters Sleep Mode with pneumatic error. 3 5
2 System lock up during start-up. 1 4, 14
3 Replenish Lyse error and system lock up. 1 14
4 Host Communication Error, Off-line --- 14
5 Maintenance message (Clean SRV, etc.) appears every day. --- 15
Cannot be cleared.
6 Host output problem in K-1000 format. --- 15
7 QC data error --- 15
8 Power Fail message appears when powered ON after the power --- 15
OFF due to error recovery instruction.
KX-21 Troubleshooting Guide -1- March 1999

(3) Hydraulic System

1 Float SW axis in Waste Chamber is broken. 4 4
2 Leakage from Diaphragm Pump 2 5
3 Sample aspiration is impossible (at installation). 1 9
4 Waste Not Draining Error 1 9
6 Replenish Lyse error and system lock up. 1 14
7 Strange sound when Rinse Cup moves up. 2 ---
(4) Pneumatic System

1 0.5 kg/cm2 Pressure Error 2 4
2 250 mmHg Vacuum Error 3 4
Pressure/Vac Error occurs frequently during start-up or while 1 4
3
entering Sleep mode.
4 System enters the Sleep Mode even when a pneumatic 1 5
error occurs. Pressing Start Switch cannot restart the
pneumatic unit.
5 Enters Sleep Mode with pneumatic error. 3 5
6 Pneumatic Unit (compressor) is noisy. 2 8
7 Pneumatic Unit stops about 15 minutes after power ON. --- 9
8 Waste Not Draining Error 1 9
(5) Electronic System

1 System does not start up. 2 7
2 Smoke from PCB No. 6350 (printer driver) 1 9
3 Power Fail message appears when powered ON after the --- 15
power OFF due to error recovery instruction.
4 Fuse is blown at installation. 5 ---
(6) Sample Processing
O b se rv e d P h e n o m e n a # of CCHF Se e page
1 Sample aspiration is impossible. 1 9
2 80% of WBC analyses at installation is abnormal. 1 10
4 Sample splash from Rinse Cup --- 14
(7) Analysis Errors/Incorrect Data Report
Obse rv e d Phe nom e na # of CCHF S e e p ag e

1 PLT background count is too high. Frequent PL flag. 1 5
2 WBC background count is too high (WBC > 500) and --- 6
does not decrease.
3 WL flag is reported frequently. 1 10
4 80% of WBC analyses at installation is abnormal. 1 10
5 No RL or RU flag reported to abnormal RDW data. - -- 14
6 Incorrect MP flagging - -- 14
7 QC data error - -- 15
8 No flag to the data exceeding lower linearity limit. - -- 15

(8) Printer or Host Computer

1 Print out is completely black. 1 5
2 Smoke from PCB No.6350 (printer driver) 1 9
3 Host Communication Error, Off-line --- 14
4 Host output with Sample ID No. 0 (zero) --- 14
5 "Printer Error" when no paper. --- 14
6 Host output problem in K-1000 format. --- 15
(9) Manufacturing/Transportation
Obse rv e d Phe nom e n # of CCHF S e e p ag e

1 Power Supply Unit is damaged during transportation. 11 5
2 Cover is damaged during transportation. 5 5
3 Pneumatic Unit fixture or fan is damaged during 11 5
transportation.
4 Compressor transportation fixing screws cannot be removed --- 8
at installation.
5 Loosened Sample Aspiration Pipette 1 9
6 Leakage inside instrument 2 ---
7 Fuse is blown at installation. 5 ---
(10) Others

1 Lateral stripes appear on the LCD. 3 7
2 Compressor transportation fixing screws cannot be removed --- 8
at installation.
3 Maintenance message (Clean SRV, etc.) appears every day. --- 15
Cannot be cleared.

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
0.5 kg/cm2 ERROR
(1) Error message or observed phenomena
“Pressure/Vac Error” (0.5 kg/cm2 Pressure Error)
“0.5 kg/cm2 Pressure Error” occurs during start-up or Sleep mode entering sequence.
(2) Cause
(a) Improper adjustment of 0.5 kg/cm2
(b) Defective 0.5 kg/cm2 regulator
(c) Program problem (Error monitoring level was incorrect, may result in system lock-up.)
(3) Action to be taken

(Possible cause a or b:)
Adjust 0.5 kg/cm2 pressure or replace the regulator. The 0.5 kg/cm2 regulator has been changed for
easier adjustment.
The newly registered regulator is: P/N 443-1972-0 Relief Valve 247L4-1VZH
(Possible cause c:)

Update to version 00-09 or higher.
(4) Reference document

ECR No. 398E030
ECR No. 398I132 (See page 14, Ver 00-09, item 3)
250 mmHg ERROR

“Pressure/Vac Error” (250 mmHg Vacuum Error)
(2) Cause
(a) Due to the leakage in the diaphragm pump (2 mL), diluent flows back into the air line tube via
MV6-2, and it reaches the T-joint above trap chamber. There the diluent crystallized and
blocked the vacuum line. (The tube connected to the Trap Chamber No. 9 becomes white.)
(b) The float in the Trap Chamber No. 9 in the Regulator Section sticks to the loosened Rubber
Packing No. 69.
(c) The position of bearing at compressor head is shifted. Then the piston slanted while moving,
giving damage to the parts around.
(d) The axis of float SW in Waste Chamber is broken.
(Possible cause a: Defective diaphragm pump)
Replace the diaphragm pump.
(Possible cause b: Trap chamber No. 9)

Manually push up the Rubber Packing No. 69. See Figure 1.
(Possible cause c: Incorrect compressor head parts position)

Correct the positions.
(Possible cause d: Broken flat SW axis in Waste Chamber)

Replace the parts.

TB No. 98040: DP Replacement
(5) Tentative countermeasure (possible cause a)

Prepare the longer tube to connect with MV6-2 and with MV8-1 so that the T-joint in the vacuum line
positions higher than the diaphragm pump to avoid back flow from the DP.

BLACK PRINT OUT
Printer outputs black paper.
(2) Cause
The cable connector is not securely connected to PCB No. 6350 CN3.

Securely connect the cable.
ENTERS SLEEP MODE WITH PNEUMATIC ERROR

“Pressure/Vac Error”
System enters the Sleep Mode even when a pneumatic error occurs.
Pressing Start Switch cannot restart the pneumatic unit.
(2) Cause
A program problem.

Update to version 00-09 or higher.

ECR No. 398I132 (See page 14, Ver 00-09, item 5)
HARDWARE DAMAGE DURING TRANSPORTATION

Power Supply Unit is not properly fixed onto the chassis, or the fixtures are bent.
Cover is broken.
Pneumatic Unit fixtures are damaged.
(2) Cause
The packing materials are not sufficient to endure the stress during transportation.

Use the reinforced packing materials, etc.
(4) Reference documents

ECR No. 398E029
HIGH BACKGROUND, PLT

“Background Error”
(2) Cause
Liquid leakage occurs at the air side of Diaphragm Pumps No. 49 (2 mL, for lyse × 1) and No. 50 (1
mL, for diluent × 2) because the diaphragm sealing is improper and liquid goes to other side of the
diaphragm.

Replace the diaphragm pump. Refer to TB No. 98040 for the procedures.

HIGH BACKGROUND, WBC
“Background Error”
WBC background count is too high (WBC > 500) and does not decrease.
(2) Cause
(a) The polyurethane tube to the WBC TD chamber pushes the Hgb Flow Cell Waste Line tube
(Silicone). Then the Hgb isolation chamber is filled, and leakage from Hgb line causes electric
noise.
(b) Liquid leakage occurs at the air side of Diaphragm Pumps No. 49 (2 mL, for lyse × 1) and No.
50 (1 mL, for diluent × 2) because the diaphragm sealing is improper and liquid goes to other
side of the diaphragm.
(c) Air bubble in the lyse reagent line.
(d) Air bubble at the internal electrode.

(Possible cause a: Electric noise)
1) Open the detector cover.
2) From front side of the instrument, the Hgb
Isolation Chamber may be found behind the WBC
TD Chamber, and tubes as shown in Figure 2.
3) Move the polyurethane tube to the right of the
earth nipple.
(If you remove the detector block, pass the
polyurethane tube below the silicone tube.)
(Possible cause c:
Air bubbles in lyse reagent)
1) Change the lyse reagent line tube
(between the WBC transducer
and the fluid connector [1]) from
Tube Silicone to Tube Polyurethane.
See Figure 3.
(Possible cause d:
Air bubbles at electrode)
1) Pull out the internal electrode
slightly so that the protruded
portion becomes 4 mm.
2) Push in the dummy electrode so
that it does not come out of
the rubber packing.
See Figure 4.

TB No. 98040: DP replacement
ECR No. 398G072: Tubing
replacement

KX DOES NOT START UP
Instrument does not start up by power switch ON.
LCD becomes blue, and the back light is ON. Fan is turning. Compressor does not function. Run
LED on PCB No. 6363 lights up (normally blinks).
(2) Cause
(a) The CPU test input pin was not pulled down on PCB No. 6363. (When this CPU test input is
not used, noise interference should be avoided by pull-down.)
(b) The output voltage of IC SP0267 (M11) was unstable, causing noise, resulting in malfunction of
FPGA (M61), thus interrupting normal start up of the CPU (PCB No. 6363). This phenomenon
tends to be observed when the IC SP0267 is from its production lot No. 9807.

(Possible cause a: No pull down resistor)
Solder a Resister 4.7 kΩ (R187) (P/N 244-0533-9: Resistor
R20 FCO2J472 4.7K) between pin 1 and pin 5 at Connector
J21 (part may not be mounted). See Figure 5.
(Possible cause b: Unstable output voltage)

Solder a 3-terminal power reset IC (P/N 221-3934-2: IC
M51951BSL) among the both ends of capacitor
C102 (power supply and GND) and the pull down resister R157
on PCB No. 6363 not to start the program until 5 V is supplied.
See Figure 6.
(4) Reference documents

ECR No. 398G031 (Pull-down resister)
ECR No. 398H052 (Reset IC)
LCD PROBLEM
Lateral stripes appear on the LCD, at worst half of the LCD is covered.
(2) Cause
Problem during LCD manufacturing. The flat cable is cracked during LCD assembly, and the cable
will be cut by the stress during transportation or affect by temperature changes.

Replace the LCD unit. (Warranty request is accepted.)
(P/N 228-3755-1: LCD Unit LSUBL 6131A)

PNEUMATIC UNIT IS NOISY
Compressor is noisy during operation.
(2) Cause
The noise level is within the company specified limit, but it is reported as a claim.
Connect a chamber to the vacuum exhaust nipple of KX-21 compressor, replacing with the silencer.
Accordingly one of the anti-noise sponges on side should be changed. See Figure 7.
(4) Reference Document
ECR No. 398G045
< Newly Necessary Parts for Modification >
366-0780-4 Chamber Mounting Plate No. 60 (1 pc)
368-5760-2 Anti-Noise Sponge No. 49-J (1 pc)
346-3614-2 O-Ring IN-20 (1 pc)
442-5338-7 Tube Polyurethane 4×6×920
348-3812-1 Screw Binding M3×4 (SUS) (10 pcs)
442-3029-0 Adaptor No. 29 (1 pc)
443-0872-1 Chamber No. 48 (1 pc)
365-6401-8 Sleeve Metal MS-06 (1 pc)
(5) Tentative Countermeasure
Instead of Chamber No. 48, Tube
Polyurethane 6 mmOD × 4 mmID can be
used for noise reduction. See Figure 8.
1) Remove the silencer connected to the
vacuum exhaust nipple.
2) Install the fitting to the vacuum exhaust
nipple.
3) Connect the polyurethane tube to the fitting.

4) Secure the tube using the metal sleeve.
5) Arrange the tube JUST AS SHOWN in Figure 8. Be careful the tube does not touch the com-
pressor.
The points are:
• Pass the tube between the chassis
cover and capacitor’s wiring cords.
• Fix the tube as shown in the figure using
a tie wrap. Make sure that the tube
length from the tied point tot the end
becomes 50 mm.
< Necessary Parts for Modification >
442-5338-7 Tube Polyurethane 4×6×500
365-6401-8 Sleeve Metal MS-06 (1 pc)
442-4145-9 Fitting BN-6×4×PT 1/8 BSN (1 pc)
266-4461-8 Tie Wrap CV-100 or equivalent
PNEUMATIC UNIT SHIPPING SUPPORT

Compressor transportation fixing screws cannot be removed at installation.
(2) Cause
When one of the two screws is tried to be removed, the screw thread catch the compressor bottom
plate which is slanted.
Loosen the screws little by little alternately so that the plate does not slant too much.

PNEUMATIC UNIT STOPS
Pneumatic unit stops about 15 minutes after power ON.
(2) Cause
Fan does not function because
(a) The wiring cords between pneumatic unit and PCB No. 6363 or that of fan is cut.
(b) The connectors or these wiring cords are disconnected.
(c) The pins of these connectors are disconnected.
(d) The plus and minus connection of fan wiring cord are opposite.
(e) The fan is defective.
Therefore the temperature inside the pneumatic unit rises to the level which the thermostat func-
tions to stop the pneumatic unit.

Check if the air is coming out from the pneumatic unit at the exhaust on the rear of KX. If not, fan
may not function. Check the wiring cords and connectors suggested above. Or replace the fan.
SAMPLE ASPIRATION IMPOSSIBLE

Sample aspiration is impossible (at installation).
(2) Cause
(a) Diluent remains in the Teflon tube (1.5 × 0.75
× 2000) between the WB aspiration DP and
diluent aspiration DP, where the reagent
crystallized and clogged. See Figure 9.
(b) Fitting No. 9-A at Manual Pipette is loosened.

(Possible cause a: Reagent crystal)
Remove the crystal in the Teflon tube using a
injector, etc.
(Possible cause b: Loosened Fitting No.9-A)

Securely tighten the fitting.
SMOKE FROM PRINTER BOARD

Smoke came out from PCB No. 6350 (printer driver).
(2) Cause
The cable connector is not correctly connected to PCB No. 6350 CN2 (shifted to side by 1 pin).
Connect the cable correctly.
WASTE NOT DRAINING ERROR

“Waste Not Draining”
(2) Cause
(a) The nut at the air filter drain is too much tightened (turned clockwise too much) and the 2.0 kg/
cm2 pressure supply for the Waste Chamber is insufficient.
(b) The nut at the air filter drain is too much loosened (turned counterclockwise too much) and the
2.0 kg/cm2 pressure supply for the Waste Chamber is insufficient.

Loosen or tighten the nut at the air filter drain to the position where a slight load is applied to the nut.
At this position, the drain port is completely opened. Apply lock tight.
NOTE: The air filter is located on the rear of regulator section.

WBC COUNT IMPOSSIBLE
At installation, more than 80% of WBC counting are abnormal. No WBC histogram can be obrained.
(2) Cause
The position of the rubber seals at WBC aperture were slipped off, generating air bubbles in trans-
ducer (improper assembly during unit production). This resulted in WBC short count time.

Replace the WBC transducer (P/N 973-2831-0: Transducer No.8 Assy).
WL FLAG INCREASE
WL flag is reported frequently (on about 30% of analyzed sample).
(2) Cause
The liquid leakage occurs at the air side of Diaphragm Pumps No. 49 (2 mL, for lyse × 1) and No. 50
(1 mL, for diluent × 2) because the diaphragm sealing is improper and liquid goes to other side of
the diaphragm.

Replace the diaphragm pump.

TB No. 98040: DP replacement

SECTION 4 TECHNICAL INFORMATION
4.1 Reagent Consumption
(1) Program Version 00-09 and thereafter (unit: mL)

Se que nce CELLPACK STROMATOLY ZER-WH CELLCLEAN
Analysis approx. 34 approx. 1 0
Start Up (Until Ready) approx. 86 approx. 3 0
*
Background check× 1
Start Up (Until Ready) approx. 154 approx. 5 0
*
Background check× 3
Mode Change approx. 14 0 0
Enter Sleep Mode approx. 9 0 0
(Pneumatic Unit OFF)
Restart 1 (resume from approx. 95 approx. 1 0
Sleep Mode after 3 hours)
Restart 1 (resume from approx. 21 0 0
Sleep Mode within 3
hours)
Shutdown approx. 86 0 approx. 0.3
Auto Rinse approx. 85 approx. 2 0
*
Background check×1
Auto Rinse approx. 153 approx. 4 0
*
Background check ×3
Replenish ST R-WH approx. 140 approx. 16 0
*
Background check ×1
Replenish ST R-WH approx. 208 approx. 18 0
*
Background check × 3
Clean Waste Chamber approx. 134 approx. 2 approx. 0.3
*
Clean Waste Chamber* approx. 202 approx. 4 approx. 0.3
*
Bakground check ×3
Clean Detector approx. 117 approx. 2 approx. 2
*
Clean Detector approx. 185 approx. 4 approx. 2
*
Aperture Brush Cleaning approx. 4 0 0
(2) Program Version 00-01 through 00-08 (unit: mL)

Se que nce CELLPACK STROMATOLY ZER-WH C E L L C L E AN
Analysis approx. 34 approx. 1 0
Start Up (Until Ready) approx. 109-177 approx. 6-8 0
Mode Change approx. 17 approx. 1 0
Enter Sleep Mode approx. 13 0 0
(Pneumatic Unit OFF)
Sleep Mode after 3 hours)
Sleep Mode within 3
hours)
Shutdown approx. 205 approx. 5 approx. 0.3
Auto Rinse approx. 84-152 approx. 3-5 0
Replenish ST R-WH approx. 140-208 approx. 17-19 0
Clean Waste Chamber approx. 134-202 approx. 3-5 approx. 0.3
Clean Detector approx. 117-185 approx. 3-5 approx. 2
Aperture Brush Cleaning approx. 7 0 0

4.2 DIP Switch Setting (DIP SW S1 on PCB No. 6363)
C-2 C-3 (220V, C-4 C-5 (220V,
Bit Function
(117V ) Europe ) (240V ) China)
OFF: Usual start up
Built-in Printer
2 ON: Connected OFF OFF OFF ON
OFF: Not connected
Host Computer
OFF: Not connected
OFF: Not connected
Histogram display in Pre-Diluted Mode
OFF: Not display
Analysis results display when imitation reagent is detected.
ON: Display analysis result with an asterisk (*)
6 ON ON ON ON
indicating unreliable data (Level 2)
OFF: Do not monitor
8 (Not Used: Fixed to ON) ON ON ON ON
4.3 PCB Location
4.4 Sensor Location

4.5 Resolved Program Problems (Versions 00-02 through 00-12)
Problem Category See Version

1 Customer maintenance 00-03, 00-10
2 Analysis results, flagging 00-03, 00-04, 00-05, 00-10, 00-12
3 Data output of I/O communication 00-06, 00-07, 00-10, 00-12
4 Setting 00-03, 00-10, 00-12
5 System operation 00-09, 00-10, 00-12
ECR No. Version Updated items Applied from

Initial version in the m arket. A1001, A1002,
398A015 00-02 Checksum Value: A1016,
Program ID Checksum A1018-A1026,
1KX2F-01 1DE7024 A1076-A1085
1KX2F-02 71CF145
398B084 00-03 Resolved program bugs: Not applicable
1) The periodical m aintenance check was not correctly (Provided for
perform ed. A1022-A1026
2) W hen optional units were not connected, [9: Service] only)
m enu rem ained on the display and could be
accessed. This problem has been resolv ed.
3) The delay tim e for Tim er m ode was longer than the
set tim e. This has been resolv ed.
4) The RDW tem perature com pensation program was
incorrect.
5) In the particle size distribution analysis in the Pre-
diluted m ode, the histogram for background analysis
was giv en (Chinese m arket only).
6) Som e mistakes in the m essages hav e been
corrected.
7) The sequence interruption process in case when an
error occurred during the shutdown sequence was
incorrect.
Checksum Value:
Program ID Checksum
1KX2F-01 1DBC0DC
1KX2F-02 7218CB9
This version was not released in the m arket. Not applicable
398C019 00-04 Resolved program bugs:
1) RDW tem perature com pensation program has been
changed.
Checksum Value:
Program ID Checksum
1KX2F-01 1DBA3178
1KX2F-02 7219393
Resolved program bugs: A1003-A1015,
398C032 00-05 1) The custom ers' HCT Calibration Value was not A1017,
reflected on the analyzed value. This has been A1027-A1075,
resolv ed. A1086-A1555
Checksum Value:
Program ID Checksum
1KX2F-01 1DBA317
1KX2F-02 7219394
Resolv ed program bugs: A1556- (Provided
398C069 00-06 1) Previously, batches of stored data were transm itted for S/N A1001,
to host com puter without any interval. A1002, A1016,
The interval has been set to 5 seconds (fixed). A1018-A1026,
Checksum Value: A1076-A1085 in
Program ID Checksum the field.)
1KX2F-01 1DC0F36
1KX2F-02 721489A
(To be continued)

4.5 Resolved Program Problems (Continued)
ECR No. Versio Updated items Applied from
n
Resolved program bugs: A1556-
398D018 00-07 1) Previously, the host com puter control signal DTR did
not turn to be active since -9V signal was output (it
should be +9V). This caused "Host Comm. Err (Off-
line)". This has been resolv ed.
Checksum Value:
Program ID Checksum
1KX2F-01 1DC09E9
1KX2F-02 7214A88
- 00-08 Not released.
Resolved program bugs: Not applicable
398G038 00-09 1) There was a possibility for sam ple splash from Rinse
Cup just before the counting in W hole Blood Mode on
som e instrum ents. In order to resolv e this problem ,
the detergent supplying time for Rinse Cup has been
changed.
2) Previously, the lysing reagent dispensing operation
was being still perform ed when [Replenish Lyse]
error occurred during operation in Initial Start-Up
Sequence, Sensitivity Adjustm ent (PLT) Sequence
and Factory Rinse Sequence. This has been
m odified so that the dispensing operation is not
perform ed after an error occurs.
3) In Initial Start-Up Sequence and PU Tim er Sequence,
when the low limit of the pressure m onitoring value
2
was set 0.35 kg/cm or less in pressure and was set
200 mm Hg or less in v acuum , "Pressure Error"
occurred.
4) Previously, when Start switch was pressed during PU
Stop Sequence, Analysis Sequence was started.
5) Enters Sleep Mode even when a pneum atic error
occurred.
Checksum Value:
Program ID Checksum
1KX2F-01 1DBC5B6
1KX2F-02 718574A
Resolved program bugs: A2296-
398I132 00-10 1) During the initialization for the production process, (Provided for all
Stored Sam ple, QC File, and Hardware Lim it could KX in the field.)
not be initialized.
2) W hen starting Shipm ent Sequence for Production
process, if Start Switch was pressed for a longer
tim e, Analysis Sequence was started after com pleting
the Shipm ent Sequence.
3) Sam ple ID No. 0 was output to HOST.
4) The date after the year of 2012 could not be correctly
output.
5) The HOST settings could not be realized unless the
power was turned OFF.
6) RL and RU flag were not indicated at RDW data.
7) MP flag was incorrectly detected.
8) The W BC analysis param eter nam e for printing the
setting values was not correctly set. The RDW unit
was also incorrect.
9) W hile [No Printer Paper] occurred, [Printer Error] also
occurred. This has been corrected.
10) In the status display screen on the PD m ode ready,
W B m ode was displayed at the status bar indication.
(To be continued)

4.5 Resolved Program Problems (Continued)
ECR No. Version Updated items Applied from

Resolved program bugs (Continued): A2296-
3981132 00-10 11) The operation status was once cleared during the (Provide for all
analysis in the status display screen. KX in the field.).
12) The analysis mode (QC) was not displayed after
recovered from QC error.
13) When Power OFF was requested (in the case of
[Pressure Lower Error], [Rinse Motor Function Error]
and the Brush Cleaning Sequence), the power
failure check has not been performed when starting
next time.
14) When a pressure error occurred during an analysis,
the sequence number was not displayed at the error
code indication.
15) The contents of EEPROM was not checked at
starting the instrument.
16) The number of the detection of [Analysis Error]
(RBC) has been changed from 10 times to once
17) The maintenance instruction message was not
cleared after the maintenance. The message
appears at every power ON.
Checksum Value:
Program ID Checksum
1KX2F-01 1E19824
1KX2F-02 6E3B53C
398L095 00-11 Not released in the field. Not applicable
Resolved program bugs: A?-
399B093 00-12 1) The QC results of PDW and MPV were displayed in (Provided for all
the opposite position (N.A. version program only) KX in the field.).
2) I mark was not added to the data which exceeded
the lower linearity limit
3) Even when no analysis was done during auto
calibration, the calibration value was calculated.
4) Even if the host output was canceled using HELP,
the data was transmitted.
5) SELECT key was accepted during Precision Check
analysis (N.A. version program only)
6) An error alarm was terminated by the other alarm
sound
7) SELECT key was not accepted after recovered from
Waste Not Draining error.
8) When power was ON after the power OFF
instruction message, Power Fail error occurred.
9) Abnormal data was accepted for X-bar QC
10) In host output using K-1000 format, NULL was sent
after ETX.
11) In host output using K-1000 format, the analysis
mode (WB or PD) was the currently selected mode
(not the one when the sample was analyzed).
12) In the stored data listing, the sample with the same
*
Sample ID on the same day did not have an mark
13) The setting not to display PDW and P-LCR was not
effective in manual discrimination analysis
14) The setting not to display PDW and P-LCR was not
stored after the power OFF
15) System became Not Ready during host transmission
without any error.
16) SELECT key was accepted when the setting change
confirmation window was on screen
17) The data with abnormal flag was accepted for QC.
Checksum Value:
Program ID Checksum
1KX2F-01 1E19824
1KX2F-02 6E3B53C

4.6 Valve Unit Tubing
(1) KX-21 Valve Unit A

1-1 Waste drain, switch pressure/vacuum 6-1 RBC diluent DP fill/dispense switch
1- 2 Waste drain, drive Pinch Valve 6-2 RBC diluent DP drive
2-1 Diluent fill, switch pressure/vacuum 7-1 RBC diluent line switch
2- 2 Diluent fill, connect diluent line 7-2 WBC/Hgb diluent line switch
3-1 Diluent chamber pressure cut 8-1 WBC/Hgb diluent DP/lyse DP drive
3-2 Rinse cup drain, drive Pinch Valve 8-2 WBC/Hgb diluent DP switch
4 ST R-WH (lyse) dispense control 8-3 WBC/Hgb lyse DP switch
5 Fill Detector Block Master Valve Assy

(3) KX-21 Valve Unit B

12-1 Fill Rinse Cup 16 SRV rotation
12-2 SRV vacuum cut 17 RBC charging
12-3 SRV outer rinse 18 PD mode sample aspiration DP drive
13 Mixing Chamber drain 19 Supply rinse into sample aspiration line
14-1 RBC Transducer drain 20 WB mode sample aspiration DP drive
14-2 WBC Transducer drain 21-1 Air gap generation
15 Hgb Flow Cell drain 21-2 Detector DP drive for counting

SYSMEX CORPORATION
C.P.O. Box 1002, Kobe 650-91, Japan
TELEPHONE: 078-303-5640
FAX: 078-303-4641
SYSMEX CORPORATION OF AMERICA

One Wildlife Way, 6699 RFD Gilmer Rd., Long Grove, IL 60047
TELEPHONE: 800-3-SYSMEX
847-726-3500
FAX: 847-726-3505
SYSMEX TRAINING CENTER

One Wildlife Way, 6699 RFD Gilmer Rd., Long Grove, IL 60047
TELEPHONE: 800-3-SYSMEX
847-726-3666
FAX: 847-726-3669
SYSMEX EUROPE GMBH

Tarpen 15 A, 2000 Hamburg 62, Germany
TELEPHONE: 040-527260
FAX: 040-52726100
SYSMEX UK LTD.
Sunrise Parkway, Linford Wood (East), Milton Keynes
Buckinghamshire, MK14 6QF, Great Britain, U.K.
TELEPHONE: 0908-669555
FAX: 0908-669409

Sysmex KX21N Manual Servicio PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sysmex KX21N Manual Servicio PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

Automated Hematology Analyzer

SYSMEX CORPORATION OF AMERICA

SYSMEX EUROPE GmbH

SYSMEX SINGAPORE PTE LTD.

Copyright © 1998 through 2000 by SYSMEX CORPORATION

First Edition April 1998

Part Code Number

KX-21 -1/2- Revised July 2000

KX-21 Ver. Hist. 1/2 TB 200128

KX-21 Ver. Hist. 2/2 TB 200128

KX-21 S/M Revised December 2000

1.2 SYSTEM ORGANIZATION

1.3 ELECTRICAL RATINGS

1.3.2 Line Frequency

1.3.3 Power Consumption

KX-21 S/M 1-1 Revised December 2000

1.5 INTENDED USE

1.6 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS

1.6.1 Analysis and Display Range

(1) Analysis Range

WBC: 1.0 - 99.9 x 103/µL

(2) Display Range

WBC: 0 - 299.9 x 103/µL

W-SCR or LYMPH%:0 - 100.0%

WBC Histogram 0 - 300 fL

KX-21 S/M 1-2 Revised December 2000

• Whole Blood Mode

Parameter Condition Whole Blood Mode Pre-diluted Mode

W-SCR 15.0% or lower 25.0% or lower

RDW-CV 4.0% or lower 6.0% or lower

WBC: 1.0 - 99.9 x 103/µL (Within ±0.3 x 103/µL or ± 3%)

KX-21 S/M 1-3 Revised December 2000

(1) Stability relative to Temperature

WBC Within 10% or 0.05 x 103/µL

(2) Within-a-Day Stability

WBC Within 10%

(3) Day-to-Day Stability

WBC Within 10%

KX-21 S/M 1-4 Revised December 2000

WBC Within 10%

1.6.8 Required Sample and Reagent Volumes

Whole Blood Mode Pre-diluted Mode Shutdown

1.6.9 Graphic LCD/Panel Keyboard

1.6.9.1 Graphic LCD Panel Display

1.6.9.2 Graphic LCD Display Items

1.6.9.3 Used Languages

1.6.10 Sample ID Number

6-digit number (KX-21)

KX-21 S/M 1-5 Revised December 2000

(1) Analysis Results: 240 samples without histograms (KX-21)

1.7.2.1 Built-in Printer Specifications

1.7.2.2 Printed Items

NOTE: DP, GP and LP are available for KX-21N only. 3

1.7.3 Serial Interface

1.7.4 Histogram Analysis

Discriminator position on the latest analysis can be manually changed.

KX-21 S/M 1-6 Revised December 2000

• X Control or L-J Control

1.7.6.1 Customer Calibration

1.7.6.2 Factory Calibration

1.7.7 Abnormality Detection Function

1.7.7.1 Error Alerting Function